forked from aniani/vim
updated for version 7.0066
This commit is contained in:
parent
4499d2ee58
commit
402d2fea70
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
||||
" Vim Compiler File
|
||||
" Compiler: ant
|
||||
" Maintainer: Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
|
||||
" Last Change: Tue, 27 Apr 2004 15:01:45 CEST
|
||||
" Last Change: Mi, 13 Apr 2005 22:50:07 CEST
|
||||
|
||||
if exists("current_compiler")
|
||||
finish
|
||||
@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ CompilerSet makeprg=ant
|
||||
" ant with jikes +E, which assumes the following
|
||||
" two property lines in your 'build.xml':
|
||||
"
|
||||
" <property name = "build.compiler" value = "jikes"/>
|
||||
" <property name = "build.compiler.emacs" value = "true"/>
|
||||
" <property name = "build.compiler" value = "jikes"/>
|
||||
" <property name = "build.compiler.emacs" value = "true"/>
|
||||
"
|
||||
" second line:
|
||||
" ant with javac
|
||||
"
|
||||
" note that this will work also for tasks like [wtkbuild]
|
||||
"
|
||||
setlocal errorformat=\ %#[%.%#]\ %#%f:%l:%v:%*\\d:%*\\d:\ %t%[%^:]%#:%m,
|
||||
CompilerSet errorformat=\ %#[%.%#]\ %#%f:%l:%v:%*\\d:%*\\d:\ %t%[%^:]%#:%m,
|
||||
\%A\ %#[%.%#]\ %f:%l:\ %m,%-Z\ %#[%.%#]\ %p^,%C\ %#[%.%#]\ %#%m
|
||||
|
||||
" ,%-C%.%#
|
||||
|
@ -257,6 +257,11 @@ HTMLS = \
|
||||
workshop.html
|
||||
|
||||
CONVERTED = \
|
||||
vim-fr.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
evim-fr.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
xxd-fr.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
vim-it.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
evim-it.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
vimdiff-it.UTF-8.1 \
|
||||
@ -380,32 +385,47 @@ os_risc.txt:
|
||||
os_win32.txt:
|
||||
touch os_win32.txt
|
||||
|
||||
vim-fr.UTF-8.1: vim-fr.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
evim-fr.UTF-8.1: evim-fr.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1: vimdiff-fr.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1: vimtutor-fr.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
xxd-fr.UTF-8.1: xxd-fr.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vim-it.UTF-8.1: vim-it.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
evim-it.UTF-8.1: evim-it.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimdiff-it.UTF-8.1: vimdiff-it.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimtutor-it.UTF-8.1: vimtutor-it.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
xxd-it.UTF-8.1: xxd-it.1
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f latin1 -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vim-ru.UTF-8.1: vim-ru.1
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
evim-ru.UTF-8.1: evim-ru.1
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimdiff-ru.UTF-8.1: vimdiff-ru.1
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
vimtutor-ru.UTF-8.1: vimtutor-ru.1
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
||||
xxd-ru.UTF-8.1: xxd-ru.1
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $> >$@
|
||||
iconv -f KOI8-R -t utf-8 $< >$@
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*change.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 16
|
||||
*change.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 03
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -915,6 +915,8 @@ inside of strings can change! Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
|
||||
current line). This always works |linewise|, thus
|
||||
this command can be used to put a yanked block as new
|
||||
lines.
|
||||
The cursor is left on the first non-blank in the last
|
||||
new line.
|
||||
The register can also be '=' followed by an optional
|
||||
expression. The expression continues until the end of
|
||||
the command. You need to escape the '|' and '"'
|
||||
@ -964,9 +966,9 @@ When using a put command like |p| or |P| in Visual mode, Vim will try to
|
||||
replace the selected text with the contents of the register. Whether this
|
||||
works well depends on the type of selection and the type of the text in the
|
||||
register. With blockwise selection it also depends on the size of the block
|
||||
and whether the corners are on an existing character. (implementation detail:
|
||||
and whether the corners are on an existing character. (Implementation detail:
|
||||
it actually works by first putting the register after the selection and then
|
||||
deleting the selection).
|
||||
deleting the selection.)
|
||||
|
||||
*blockwise-register*
|
||||
If you use a blockwise Visual mode command to get the text into the register,
|
||||
@ -1417,7 +1419,7 @@ If the 'comments' option includes "/*", "*" and/or "*/", then Vim has some
|
||||
built in stuff to treat these types of comments a bit more cleverly.
|
||||
Opening a new line before or after "/*" or "*/" (with 'r' or 'o' present in
|
||||
'formatoptions') gives the correct start of the line automatically. The same
|
||||
happens with formatting and auto-wrapping. Opening a line after a line
|
||||
happens with formatting and auto-wrapping. Opening a line after a line
|
||||
starting with "/*" or "*" and containing "*/", will cause no comment leader to
|
||||
be inserted, and the indent of the new line is taken from the line containing
|
||||
the start of the comment.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*debugger.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 07
|
||||
*debugger.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Gordon Prieur
|
||||
@ -27,19 +27,19 @@ Environment (IDE):
|
||||
|
||||
These features were added specifically for use in the Motif version of gvim.
|
||||
However, the |alt-input| and |debug-highlight| were written to be usable in
|
||||
both vim and gvim. Some of the other features could be used in the non-GUI
|
||||
vim with slight modifications. However, I did not do this nor did I test the
|
||||
both vim and gvim. Some of the other features could be used in the non-GUI
|
||||
vim with slight modifications. However, I did not do this nor did I test the
|
||||
reliability of building for vim or non Motif GUI versions.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.1 Alternate Command Input *alt-input*
|
||||
|
||||
For Vim to work with a debugger there must be at least an input connection
|
||||
with a debugger or external tool. In many cases there will also be an output
|
||||
with a debugger or external tool. In many cases there will also be an output
|
||||
connection but this isn't absolutely necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
The purpose of the input connection is to let the external debugger send
|
||||
commands to Vim. The commands sent by the debugger should give the debugger
|
||||
commands to Vim. The commands sent by the debugger should give the debugger
|
||||
enough control to display the current debug environment and state.
|
||||
|
||||
The current implementation is based on the X Toolkit dispatch loop and the
|
||||
@ -49,15 +49,15 @@ XtAddInput() function call.
|
||||
1.2 Debug Signs *debug-signs*
|
||||
|
||||
Many debuggers mark specific lines by placing a small sign or color highlight
|
||||
on the line. The |:sign| command lets the debugger set this graphic mark. Some
|
||||
on the line. The |:sign| command lets the debugger set this graphic mark. Some
|
||||
examples where this feature would be used would be a debugger showing an arrow
|
||||
representing the Program Counter (PC) of the program being debugged. Another
|
||||
example would be a small stop sign for a line with a breakpoint. These visible
|
||||
representing the Program Counter (PC) of the program being debugged. Another
|
||||
example would be a small stop sign for a line with a breakpoint. These visible
|
||||
highlights let the user keep track of certain parts of the state of the
|
||||
debugger.
|
||||
|
||||
This feature can be used with more than debuggers, too. An IPE can use a sign
|
||||
to highlight build errors, searched text, or other things. The sign feature
|
||||
This feature can be used with more than debuggers, too. An IPE can use a sign
|
||||
to highlight build errors, searched text, or other things. The sign feature
|
||||
can also work together with the |debug-highlight| to ensure the mark is
|
||||
highly visible.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -66,17 +66,17 @@ Debug signs are defined and placed using the |:sign| command.
|
||||
|
||||
1.3 Debug Source Highlight *debug-highlight*
|
||||
|
||||
This feature allows a line to have a predominant highlight. The highlight is
|
||||
intended to make a specific line stand out. The highlight could be made to
|
||||
This feature allows a line to have a predominant highlight. The highlight is
|
||||
intended to make a specific line stand out. The highlight could be made to
|
||||
work for both vim and gvim, whereas the debug sign is, in most cases, limited
|
||||
to gvim. The one exception to this is Sun Microsystem's dtterm. The dtterm
|
||||
to gvim. The one exception to this is Sun Microsystem's dtterm. The dtterm
|
||||
from Sun has a "sign gutter" for showing signs.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1.4 Message Footer *gui-footer*
|
||||
|
||||
The message footer can be used to display messages from a debugger or IPE. It
|
||||
can also be used to display menu and toolbar tips. The footer area is at the
|
||||
The message footer can be used to display messages from a debugger or IPE. It
|
||||
can also be used to display menu and toolbar tips. The footer area is at the
|
||||
bottom of the GUI window, below the line used to display colon commands.
|
||||
|
||||
The display of the footer is controlled by the 'guioptions' letter 'F'.
|
||||
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ The display of the footer is controlled by the 'guioptions' letter 'F'.
|
||||
1.5 Balloon Evaluation *balloon-eval*
|
||||
|
||||
This feature allows a debugger, or other external tool, to display dynamic
|
||||
information based on where the mouse is pointing. The purpose of this feature
|
||||
information based on where the mouse is pointing. The purpose of this feature
|
||||
was to allow Sun's Visual WorkShop debugger to display expression evaluations.
|
||||
However, the feature was implemented in as general a manner as possible and
|
||||
could be used for displaying other information as well.
|
||||
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ completely user definable.
|
||||
2. Vim Compile Options *debugger-compilation*
|
||||
|
||||
The debugger features were added explicitly for use with Sun's Visual
|
||||
WorkShop Integrated Programming Environment (ipe). However, they were done
|
||||
WorkShop Integrated Programming Environment (ipe). However, they were done
|
||||
in as generic a manner as possible so that integration with other debuggers
|
||||
could also use some or all of the tools used with Sun's ipe.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ The following compile time preprocessor variables control the features:
|
||||
Message Footer FEAT_FOOTER
|
||||
Balloon Evaluation FEAT_BEVAL
|
||||
|
||||
The first integration with a full IPE/IDE was with Sun Visual WorkShop. To
|
||||
The first integration with a full IPE/IDE was with Sun Visual WorkShop. To
|
||||
compile a gvim which interfaces with VWS set the following flag, which sets
|
||||
all the above flags:
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*develop.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jan 17
|
||||
*develop.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -366,7 +366,33 @@ window View on a buffer. There can be several windows in Vim,
|
||||
fit in the shell.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To be continued...
|
||||
Spell checking *develop-spell*
|
||||
|
||||
When spell checking was going to be added to Vim a survey was done over the
|
||||
available spell checking libraries and programs. Unfortunately, the result
|
||||
was that none of them provided sufficient capabilities to be used as the spell
|
||||
checking engine in Vim, for various reasons:
|
||||
|
||||
- Missing support for multi-byte encodings. At least UTF-8 must be supported,
|
||||
so that more than one language can be used in the same file.
|
||||
- For the programs and libraries: Using them as-is would require installing
|
||||
them separately from Vim. That's not impossible, but a drawback.
|
||||
- Performance: A few tests showed that it's possible to check spelling on the
|
||||
fly (while redrawing), just like syntax highlighting. But the mechanisms
|
||||
used by other code are much slower. Myspell uses a simplistic hashtable,
|
||||
for example.
|
||||
- For a program like aspell a communication mechanism would have to be setup.
|
||||
That's complicated to do in a portable way (Unix-only would be relatively
|
||||
simple, but that's not good enough). And performance will become a problem
|
||||
(lots of process switching involved).
|
||||
- Missing support for words with non-word characters, such as "Etten-Leur" and
|
||||
"et al.", would require marking the pieces of them OK, lowering the
|
||||
reliability.
|
||||
- Missing support for regions or dialects. Makes it difficult to accept
|
||||
all English words and highlight non-Canadian words differently.
|
||||
- Missing support for rare words. Many words are correct but hardly ever used
|
||||
and could be a misspelled often-used word.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
4. Assumptions *design-assumptions*
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*editing.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 14
|
||||
*editing.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ However, the alternate file name is not changed when |:keepalt| is used.
|
||||
name. {not in Vi}
|
||||
|
||||
All file names are remembered in the buffer list. When you enter a file name,
|
||||
for editing (e.g., with ":e filename") or writing (e.g., with ":w file name"),
|
||||
for editing (e.g., with ":e filename") or writing (e.g., with ":w filename"),
|
||||
the file name is added to the list. You can use the buffer list to remember
|
||||
which files you edited and to quickly switch from one file to another (e.g.,
|
||||
to copy text) with the |CTRL-^| command. First type the number of the file
|
||||
@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ CTRL-G or *CTRL-G* *:f* *:fi* *:file*
|
||||
:f[ile] Prints the current file name (as typed), the
|
||||
cursor position (unless the 'ruler' option is set),
|
||||
and the file status (readonly, modified, read errors,
|
||||
new file). See the 'shortmess' option about how tho
|
||||
new file). See the 'shortmess' option about how to
|
||||
make this message shorter. {Vi does not include
|
||||
column number}
|
||||
|
||||
@ -910,8 +910,8 @@ if the system allows it (the directory must be writable).
|
||||
*write-fail*
|
||||
If the writing of the new file fails, you have to be careful not to lose
|
||||
your changes AND the original file. If there is no backup file and writing
|
||||
the new file failed, you have already lost the original file! DON'T EXIT VIM
|
||||
UNTIL YOU WRITE OUT THE FILE! If a backup was made, it is put back in place
|
||||
the new file failed, you have already lost the original file! DON'T EXIT VIM
|
||||
UNTIL YOU WRITE OUT THE FILE! If a backup was made, it is put back in place
|
||||
of the original file (if possible). If you exit Vim, and lose the changes
|
||||
you made, the original file will mostly still be there. If putting back the
|
||||
original file fails, there will be an error message telling you that you
|
||||
@ -1391,6 +1391,11 @@ It is also possible that you modified the file yourself, from another edit
|
||||
session or with another command (e.g., a filter command). Then you will know
|
||||
which version of the file you want to keep.
|
||||
|
||||
There is one situation where you get the message while there is nothing wrong:
|
||||
On a Win32 system on the day daylight saving time starts. There is something
|
||||
in the Win32 libraries that confuses Vim about the hour time difference. The
|
||||
problem goes away the next day.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
11. File Searching *file-searching*
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1401,7 +1406,7 @@ options. There are three different types of searching:
|
||||
|
||||
1) Downward search:
|
||||
Downward search uses the wildcards '*', '**' and possibly others
|
||||
supported by your operating system. '*' and '**' are handled inside Vim, so
|
||||
supported by your operating system. '*' and '**' are handled inside Vim, so
|
||||
they work on all operating systems.
|
||||
|
||||
The usage of '*' is quite simple: It matches 0 or more characters.
|
||||
@ -1435,10 +1440,10 @@ options. There are three different types of searching:
|
||||
|
||||
2) Upward search:
|
||||
Here you can give a directory and then search the directory tree upward for
|
||||
a file. You could give stop-directories to limit the upward search. The
|
||||
a file. You could give stop-directories to limit the upward search. The
|
||||
stop-directories are appended to the path (for the 'path' option) or to
|
||||
the filename (for the 'tags' option) with a ';'. If you want several
|
||||
stop-directories separate them with ';'. If you want no stop-directory
|
||||
the filename (for the 'tags' option) with a ';'. If you want several
|
||||
stop-directories separate them with ';'. If you want no stop-directory
|
||||
("search upward till the root directory) just use ';'. >
|
||||
/usr/include/sys;/usr
|
||||
< will search in: >
|
||||
@ -1457,7 +1462,7 @@ options. There are three different types of searching:
|
||||
/u/user_x/work/include
|
||||
/u/user_x/include
|
||||
|
||||
3) Combined up/downward search
|
||||
3) Combined up/downward search:
|
||||
If Vim's current path is /u/user_x/work/release and you do >
|
||||
set path=**;/u/user_x
|
||||
< and then search for a file with |gf| the file is searched in: >
|
||||
@ -1465,10 +1470,10 @@ options. There are three different types of searching:
|
||||
/u/user_x/work/**
|
||||
/u/user_x/**
|
||||
<
|
||||
BE CAREFUL! This might consume a lot of time, as the search of
|
||||
BE CAREFUL! This might consume a lot of time, as the search of
|
||||
'/u/user_x/**' includes '/u/user_x/work/**' and
|
||||
'/u/user_x/work/release/**'. So '/u/user_x/work/release/**' is searched
|
||||
three and '/u/user_x/work/**' is searched two times.
|
||||
three times and '/u/user_x/work/**' is searched twice.
|
||||
|
||||
In the above example you might want to set path to: >
|
||||
:set path=**,/u/user_x/**
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*eval.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 26
|
||||
*eval.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ v:warningmsg Last given warning message. It's allowed to set this variable.
|
||||
|
||||
See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for.
|
||||
|
||||
(Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation)
|
||||
(Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.)
|
||||
|
||||
USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1620,7 +1620,7 @@ writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
|
||||
|
||||
add({list}, {expr}) *add()*
|
||||
Append the item {expr} to List {list}. Returns the resulting
|
||||
List. Examples: >
|
||||
List. Examples: >
|
||||
:let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
|
||||
:call add(mylist, "woodstock")
|
||||
< Note that when {expr} is a List it is appended as a single
|
||||
@ -1809,6 +1809,7 @@ char2nr({expr}) *char2nr()*
|
||||
< The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": >
|
||||
char2nr("á") returns 225
|
||||
char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195
|
||||
< nr2char() does the opposite.
|
||||
|
||||
cindent({lnum}) *cindent()*
|
||||
Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
|
||||
@ -2551,10 +2552,10 @@ getqflist() *getqflist()*
|
||||
|
||||
getreg([{regname}]) *getreg()*
|
||||
The result is a String, which is the contents of register
|
||||
{regname}. Example: >
|
||||
{regname}. Example: >
|
||||
:let cliptext = getreg('*')
|
||||
< getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
|
||||
register. (For use in maps).
|
||||
register. (For use in maps.)
|
||||
If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2677,7 +2678,7 @@ histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()*
|
||||
< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
|
||||
|
||||
histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()*
|
||||
Clear {history}, ie. delete all its entries. See |hist-names|
|
||||
Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names|
|
||||
for the possible values of {history}.
|
||||
|
||||
If the parameter {item} is given as String, this is seen
|
||||
@ -2753,7 +2754,7 @@ hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
|
||||
|
||||
hostname() *hostname()*
|
||||
The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
|
||||
which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than
|
||||
which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than
|
||||
256 characters long are truncated.
|
||||
|
||||
iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()*
|
||||
@ -2873,7 +2874,7 @@ insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()*
|
||||
{idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
|
||||
like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see
|
||||
|list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item.
|
||||
Returns the resulting List. Examples: >
|
||||
Returns the resulting List. Examples: >
|
||||
:let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
|
||||
:call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
|
||||
:call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
|
||||
@ -3131,7 +3132,7 @@ match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *match()*
|
||||
If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
|
||||
{start} in a String or item {start} in a List.
|
||||
The result, however, is still the index counted from the
|
||||
first character/item. Example: >
|
||||
first character/item. Example: >
|
||||
:echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
|
||||
< result is again "4". >
|
||||
:echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
|
||||
@ -3405,7 +3406,7 @@ repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()*
|
||||
:let seperator = repeat('-', 80)
|
||||
< When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
|
||||
When {expr} is a List the result is {expr} concatenated
|
||||
{count} times. Example: >
|
||||
{count} times. Example: >
|
||||
:let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
|
||||
< Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3544,7 +3545,7 @@ server2client( {clientid}, {string}) *server2client()*
|
||||
{only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
|
||||
Note:
|
||||
This id has to be stored before the next command can be
|
||||
received. Ie. before returning from the received command and
|
||||
received. I.e. before returning from the received command and
|
||||
before calling any commands that waits for input.
|
||||
See also |clientserver|.
|
||||
Example: >
|
||||
@ -3587,9 +3588,10 @@ setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()*
|
||||
line.
|
||||
|
||||
setline({lnum}, {line}) *setline()*
|
||||
Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {line}. If this
|
||||
succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely because
|
||||
{lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: >
|
||||
Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {line}.
|
||||
{lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
|
||||
If this succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely
|
||||
because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: >
|
||||
:call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
|
||||
< Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3715,7 +3717,9 @@ split({expr} [, {pattern}]) *split()*
|
||||
:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
|
||||
< Since empty strings are not added the "\+" isn't required but
|
||||
it makes the function work a bit faster.
|
||||
The opposite function is |join()|.
|
||||
To split a string in individual characters: >
|
||||
:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
|
||||
< The opposite function is |join()|.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()*
|
||||
@ -3806,7 +3810,7 @@ strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()*
|
||||
For pattern searches use |match()|.
|
||||
-1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
|
||||
If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
|
||||
See also |stridx()|. Examples: >
|
||||
See also |stridx()|. Examples: >
|
||||
:echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3
|
||||
< *strrchr()*
|
||||
When used with a single character it works similar to the C
|
||||
@ -3940,7 +3944,7 @@ taglist({expr}) *taglist()*
|
||||
defined.
|
||||
cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in
|
||||
the file.
|
||||
kind type of the tag. The value for this
|
||||
kind type of the tag. The value for this
|
||||
entry depends on the language specific
|
||||
kind values generated by the ctags
|
||||
tool.
|
||||
@ -4068,7 +4072,7 @@ visualmode([expr]) *visualmode()*
|
||||
|
||||
*winbufnr()*
|
||||
winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
|
||||
associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of
|
||||
associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of
|
||||
the buffer in the current window is returned. When window
|
||||
{nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
|
||||
Example: >
|
||||
@ -4657,7 +4661,7 @@ You can use multiple brace pairs: >
|
||||
where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective".
|
||||
|
||||
However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single
|
||||
variable name. e.g. this is invalid: >
|
||||
variable name, e.g. this is invalid: >
|
||||
:let foo='a + b'
|
||||
:echo c{foo}d
|
||||
.. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name.
|
||||
|
56
runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
56
runtime/doc/evim-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
|
||||
.TH EVIM 1 "16 février 2002 February 16"
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
evim \- « Easy Vim », édite un fichier avec Vim sans utiliser les modes
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B evim
|
||||
[options] [fichier ...]
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B eview
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.B eVim
|
||||
lance
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
et configure ses options afin qu'il se comporte comme un éditeur sans mode.
|
||||
Cela reste Vim, mais vous pouvez l'utiliser comme un éditeur « cliquer-taper ».
|
||||
Cela ressemble beaucoup à l'édition avec Notepad sur MS-Windows.
|
||||
.B eVim
|
||||
ne fonctionne qu'avec l'interface graphique, qui est nécessaire pour permettre
|
||||
l'utilisation des menus et de la barre d'outils.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Il n'est utile qu'aux personnes qui ne parviennent vraiment pas à utiliser Vim
|
||||
de façon traditionnelle. L'édition est alors bien moins efficace.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B eview
|
||||
fait la même chose, mais démarre Vim en mode Lecture-seule.
|
||||
Cela revient à lancer evim \-R.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Voir vim(1) pour davantage d'informations sur Vim, les options, etc.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
L'option 'insertmode' est activée pour permettre de taper directement du texte.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Les mappages sont configurés pour que Copier et Coller fonctionnent avec les
|
||||
raccourcis habituels de MS-Windows. CTRL-X coupe le texte, CTRL-C copie le
|
||||
texte et CTRL-V colle le texte.
|
||||
Vous pouvez utiliser CTRL-Q pour obtenir la fonction originale de CTRL-V.
|
||||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
Voir vim(1).
|
||||
.SH FICHIERS
|
||||
.TP 15
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/vim/evim.vim
|
||||
Le script chargé pour initialiser eVim.
|
||||
.SH AUSSI CONNU SOUS
|
||||
Également connu sous le nom « Vim pour gumbies » [N.D.T. : Flying Circus...].
|
||||
Quand vous utilisez eVim, vous êtes censé prendre un mouchoir de poche,
|
||||
faire un noeud à chaque coin et le porter sur votre tête.
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
La majeure partie de
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
a été écrite par Bram Moolenaar, avec l'aide de nombreux autres contributeurs.
|
||||
Voir le menu Aide/Remerciements ou ":help credits" dans
|
||||
.B Vim.
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite David Blanchet.
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-26.
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*fold.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 29
|
||||
*fold.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ zC Close all folds under the cursor recursively. Folds that
|
||||
'foldenable' will be set.
|
||||
|
||||
*za*
|
||||
za When on a closed fold: open it. When folds are nested, you
|
||||
za When on a closed fold: open it. When folds are nested, you
|
||||
may have to use "za" several times. When a count is given,
|
||||
that many closed folds are opened.
|
||||
When on an open fold: close it and set 'foldenable'. This
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*gui.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Jan 14
|
||||
*gui.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ When the scrollbar is dragged all the way down, the last line of the file
|
||||
will appear in the top of the window.
|
||||
|
||||
If a window is shrunk to zero height (by the growth of another window) its
|
||||
scrollbar disappears. It reappears when the window is restored.
|
||||
scrollbar disappears. It reappears when the window is restored.
|
||||
|
||||
If a window is vertically split, it will get a scrollbar when it is the
|
||||
current window and when, taking the middle of the current window and drawing a
|
||||
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ used - you should read whichever of these is appropriate now).
|
||||
*clipboard*
|
||||
There is a special register for storing this selection, it is the "*
|
||||
register. Nothing is put in here unless the information about what text is
|
||||
selected is about to change (eg with a left mouse click somewhere), or when
|
||||
selected is about to change (e.g. with a left mouse click somewhere), or when
|
||||
another application wants to paste the selected text. Then the text is put
|
||||
in the "* register. For example, to cut a line and make it the current
|
||||
selection/put it on the clipboard: >
|
||||
@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ floating menus that do not appear on the main menu bar.
|
||||
*E328* *E329* *E337*
|
||||
To create a new menu item, use the ":menu" commands. They are mostly like
|
||||
the ":map" set of commands but the first argument is a menu item name, given
|
||||
as a path of menus and submenus with a '.' between them. eg: >
|
||||
as a path of menus and submenus with a '.' between them, e.g.: >
|
||||
|
||||
:menu File.Save :w<CR>
|
||||
:inoremenu File.Save <C-O>:w<CR>
|
||||
@ -648,9 +648,9 @@ simple.
|
||||
|
||||
*gui-toolbar*
|
||||
The toolbar is currently available in the Win32, Athena, Motif, GTK+ (X11),
|
||||
KDE and Photon GUI. It should turn up in other GUIs in due course. The default
|
||||
toolbar is setup in menu.vim.
|
||||
The display of the toolbar is controlled by the 'guioptions' letter 'T'. You
|
||||
KDE and Photon GUI. It should turn up in other GUIs in due course. The
|
||||
default toolbar is setup in menu.vim.
|
||||
The display of the toolbar is controlled by the 'guioptions' letter 'T'. You
|
||||
can thus have menu & toolbar together, or either on its own, or neither.
|
||||
The appearance is controlled by the 'toolbar' option. You can chose between
|
||||
an image, text or both.
|
||||
@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ level. Vim interprets the items in this menu as follows:
|
||||
1) If an "icon=" argument was specified, the file with this name is used.
|
||||
The file can either be specified with the full path or with the base name.
|
||||
In the last case it is searched for in the "bitmaps" directory in
|
||||
'runtimepath', like in point 3). Examples: >
|
||||
'runtimepath', like in point 3. Examples: >
|
||||
:amenu icon=/usr/local/pixmaps/foo_icon.xpm ToolBar.Foo :echo "Foo"<CR>
|
||||
:amenu icon=FooIcon ToolBar.Foo :echo "Foo"<CR>
|
||||
< Note that in the first case the extension is included, while in the second
|
||||
@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ level. Vim interprets the items in this menu as follows:
|
||||
A menu priority must come _after_ the icon argument: >
|
||||
:amenu icon=foo 1.42 ToolBar.Foo :echo "42!"<CR>
|
||||
2) An item called 'BuiltIn##', where ## is a number, is taken as number ## of
|
||||
the built-in bitmaps available in Vim. Currently there are 31 numbered
|
||||
the built-in bitmaps available in Vim. Currently there are 31 numbered
|
||||
from 0 to 30 which cover most common editing operations |builtin-tools|. >
|
||||
:amenu ToolBar.BuiltIn22 :call SearchNext("back")<CR>
|
||||
3) An item with another name is first searched for in the directory
|
||||
@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ To see what an existing menu is mapped to, use just one argument after the
|
||||
menu commands (just like you would with the ":map" commands). If the menu
|
||||
specified is a submenu, then all menus under that hierarchy will be shown.
|
||||
If no argument is given after :menu at all, then ALL menu items are shown
|
||||
for the appropriate mode (eg, Command-line mode for :cmenu).
|
||||
for the appropriate mode (e.g., Command-line mode for :cmenu).
|
||||
|
||||
Special characters in the list, just before the rhs:
|
||||
* The menu was defined with "nore" to disallow remapping.
|
||||
@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ See section |42.4| in the user manual.
|
||||
|
||||
When a tip is defined for a menu item, it appears in the command-line area
|
||||
when the mouse is over that item, much like a standard Windows menu hint in
|
||||
the status bar. (Except when Vim is in Command-line mode, when of course
|
||||
the status bar. (Except when Vim is in Command-line mode, when of course
|
||||
nothing is displayed.)
|
||||
When a tip is defined for a ToolBar item, it appears as a tooltip when the
|
||||
mouse pauses over that button, in the usual fashion. Use the |hl-Tooltip|
|
||||
@ -870,7 +870,7 @@ The tip is defined like this: >
|
||||
And delete it with: >
|
||||
:tunmenu MyMenu.Hello
|
||||
|
||||
Tooltips are currently only supported for the X11 and Win32 GUI. However, they
|
||||
Tooltips are currently only supported for the X11 and Win32 GUI. However, they
|
||||
should appear for the other gui platforms in the not too distant future.
|
||||
|
||||
The ":tmenu" command works just like other menu commands, it uses the same
|
||||
@ -920,7 +920,7 @@ This section describes other features which are related to the GUI.
|
||||
get "<Modifiers-Key>".
|
||||
|
||||
- In the GUI, the modifiers SHIFT, CTRL, and ALT (or META) may be used within
|
||||
mappings of special keys and mouse events. eg: :map <M-LeftDrag> <LeftDrag>
|
||||
mappings of special keys and mouse events. E.g.: :map <M-LeftDrag> <LeftDrag>
|
||||
|
||||
- In the GUI, several normal keys may have modifiers in mappings etc, these
|
||||
are <Space>, <Tab>, <NL>, <CR>, <Esc>.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*gui_w16.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2001 Sep 03
|
||||
*gui_w16.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -21,32 +21,32 @@ Other relevant documentation:
|
||||
|
||||
{Vi does not have a Windows GUI}
|
||||
|
||||
The Win16 version of Vim will run on Windows 3.1 or later. It has not been
|
||||
The Win16 version of Vim will run on Windows 3.1 or later. It has not been
|
||||
tested on 3.0, it probably won't work without being recompiled and
|
||||
modified. (but you really should upgrade to 3.11 anyway. :)
|
||||
modified. (But you really should upgrade to 3.11 anyway. :)
|
||||
|
||||
In most respects it behaves identically to the Win32 GUI version, including
|
||||
having a flat-style toolbar(!). The chief differences:
|
||||
having a flat-style toolbar(!). The chief differences:
|
||||
|
||||
1) Bold/Italic text is not available, to speed up repaint/reduce resource
|
||||
usage. (You can re-instate this by undefining MSWIN16_FASTTEXT.)
|
||||
usage. (You can re-instate this by undefining MSWIN16_FASTTEXT.)
|
||||
2) No tearoff menu emulation.
|
||||
3) No OLE interface.
|
||||
4) No long filename support (of course)
|
||||
4) No long filename support (of course).
|
||||
5) No tooltips on toolbar buttons - instead they produce command-line tips
|
||||
like menu items do.
|
||||
6) Line length limited to 32767 characters (like 16-bit DOS version)
|
||||
6) Line length limited to 32767 characters (like 16-bit DOS version).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
1. Starting the GUI *win16-start*
|
||||
|
||||
The Win16 GUI version of Vim will always start the GUI, no matter how you
|
||||
start it or what it's called. There is no 'console' version as such, but you
|
||||
start it or what it's called. There is no 'console' version as such, but you
|
||||
can use one of the DOS versions in a DOS box.
|
||||
|
||||
The Win16 GUI has an extra menu item: "Window/Select Font". It brings up the
|
||||
standard Windows font selector. Note that bold and italic fonts are not
|
||||
standard Windows font selector. Note that bold and italic fonts are not
|
||||
supported in an attempt to maximize GDI drawing speed.
|
||||
|
||||
Setting the menu height doesn't work for the Win16 GUI.
|
||||
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The clipboard works in the same way as the Win32 version: see |gui-clipboard|.
|
||||
4. Shell Commands *win16-shell*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim spawns a DOS window for external commands, to make it possible to run any
|
||||
DOS command. The window uses the _default.pif settings.
|
||||
DOS command. The window uses the _default.pif settings.
|
||||
|
||||
*win16-!start*
|
||||
Normally, Vim waits for a command to complete before continuing (this makes
|
||||
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ as the traditional interface shared with the console version.
|
||||
6.1 Dialogs
|
||||
|
||||
The dialogs displayed by the "confirm" family (i.e. the 'confirm' option,
|
||||
|:confirm| command and |confirm()| function are GUI-based rather than the
|
||||
|:confirm| command and |confirm()| function) are GUI-based rather than the
|
||||
console-based ones used by other versions. There is no option to change this.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ PrintFile. See $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim for how it works by default.
|
||||
Using this should also work: >
|
||||
:w >>prn
|
||||
|
||||
Vim supports a number of standard MS Windows features. Some of these are
|
||||
Vim supports a number of standard MS Windows features. Some of these are
|
||||
detailed elsewhere: see |'mouse'|, |win32-hidden-menus|.
|
||||
Also see |:simalt|
|
||||
|
||||
@ -176,11 +176,11 @@ names with any Ex command.
|
||||
|
||||
*win16-truetype*
|
||||
It is recommended that you use a raster font and not a TrueType
|
||||
fixed-pitch font. e.g. Use Courier, not Courier New. This is not just
|
||||
fixed-pitch font. E.g. use Courier, not Courier New. This is not just
|
||||
to use less resources but because there are subtle bugs in the
|
||||
handling of fixed-pitch TrueType in Win3.1x. In particular, when you move
|
||||
handling of fixed-pitch TrueType in Win3.1x. In particular, when you move
|
||||
a block cursor over a pipe character '|', the cursor is drawn in the wrong
|
||||
size and bits get left behind. This is a bug in the Win3.1x GDI, it doesn't
|
||||
size and bits get left behind. This is a bug in the Win3.1x GDI, it doesn't
|
||||
happen if you run the exe under 95/NT.
|
||||
|
||||
vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*gui_w32.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 14
|
||||
*gui_w32.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ of Windows 3.1 or 3.11. See |win32s|.
|
||||
|
||||
To set Vim as the default editor for a file type:
|
||||
1. Start a Windows Explorer
|
||||
2. Chose View/Options -> File Types
|
||||
2. Choose View/Options -> File Types
|
||||
3. Select the path to gvim for every file type that you want to use it for.
|
||||
(you can also use three spaces in the file type field, for files without an
|
||||
extension).
|
||||
@ -262,8 +262,8 @@ question if you really want to kill the application, Vim may be killed too!
|
||||
|
||||
In Windows 95, the window in which the commands are executed is always 25x80
|
||||
characters, to be as DOS compatible as possible (this matters!). The default
|
||||
system font is used. On NT, the window will be the default you have set up for
|
||||
"Console" in Control Panel. On Win32s, the properties of the DOS box are
|
||||
system font is used. On NT, the window will be the default you have set up for
|
||||
"Console" in Control Panel. On Win32s, the properties of the DOS box are
|
||||
determined by _default.pif in the windows directory.
|
||||
|
||||
*msdos-mode*
|
||||
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ sense for most shell commands which produce output for Vim to use). If you
|
||||
want Vim to start a program and return immediately, you can use the following
|
||||
syntax on W95 & NT: >
|
||||
:!start {command}
|
||||
On Win32s, you will have to go to another window instead. Don't forget that
|
||||
On Win32s, you will have to go to another window instead. Don't forget that
|
||||
you must tell Windows 3.1x to keep executing a DOS command in the background
|
||||
while you switch back to Vim.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ On Win32, the normal DOS colors can be used. See |dos-colors|.
|
||||
Additionally the system configured colors can also be used. These are known
|
||||
by the names Sys_XXX, where XXX is the appropriate system color name, from the
|
||||
following list (see the Win32 documentation for full descriptions). Case is
|
||||
ignored. note: On Win32s not all of these colors are supported.
|
||||
ignored. Note: On Win32s not all of these colors are supported.
|
||||
|
||||
Sys_3DDKShadow Sys_3DFace Sys_BTNFace
|
||||
Sys_3DHilight Sys_3DHighlight Sys_BTNHilight
|
||||
@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ without having to go to the menu bar each time.
|
||||
This is most useful if you find yourself using a command buried in a sub-menu
|
||||
over and over again.
|
||||
The tearoff menus can be positioned where you like, and always stay just above
|
||||
the Main Vim window. You can get rid of them by closing them as usual; they
|
||||
the Main Vim window. You can get rid of them by closing them as usual; they
|
||||
also of course close when you exit Vim.
|
||||
|
||||
*:tearoff* *:te*
|
||||
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ The rules are:
|
||||
b) Parameters are separated by white space.
|
||||
c) A parameter can be enclosed in double quotes to include white space.
|
||||
d) A sequence of zero or more backslashes (\) and a double quote (")
|
||||
is special. The effective number of backslashes is halved, rounded
|
||||
is special. The effective number of backslashes is halved, rounded
|
||||
down. An even number of backslashes reverses the acceptability of
|
||||
spaces and tabs, an odd number of backslashes produces a literal
|
||||
double quote.
|
||||
@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ The "File/Print" menu prints the text with syntax highlighting, see
|
||||
printer installed this should also work: >
|
||||
:w >>prn
|
||||
|
||||
Vim supports a number of standard MS Windows features. Some of these are
|
||||
Vim supports a number of standard MS Windows features. Some of these are
|
||||
detailed elsewhere: see |'mouse'|, |win32-hidden-menus|.
|
||||
|
||||
*drag-n-drop-win32*
|
||||
@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ be opened as normal. See |drag-n-drop|.
|
||||
{not in Vi} {only for Win32 versions}
|
||||
|
||||
Normally, Vim takes control of all Alt-<Key> combinations, to increase the
|
||||
number of possible mappings. This clashes with the standard use of Alt as the
|
||||
number of possible mappings. This clashes with the standard use of Alt as the
|
||||
key for accessing menus.
|
||||
The quick way of getting standard behavior is to set the 'winaltkeys' option
|
||||
to "yes". This however prevents you from mapping Alt keys at all.
|
||||
@ -449,18 +449,18 @@ Another way is to set 'winaltkeys' to "menu". Menu shortcut keys are then
|
||||
handled by windows, other ALT keys can be mapped. This doesn't allow a
|
||||
dependency on the current state though.
|
||||
To get round this, the :simalt command allows Vim (when 'winaltkeys' is not
|
||||
"yes") to fake a Windows-style Alt keypress. You can use this to map Alt key
|
||||
"yes") to fake a Windows-style Alt keypress. You can use this to map Alt key
|
||||
combinations (or anything else for that matter) to produce standard Windows
|
||||
actions. Here are some examples: >
|
||||
actions. Here are some examples: >
|
||||
|
||||
:map <M-f> :simalt f<CR>
|
||||
This makes Alt-F pop down the 'File' menu (with the stock Menu.vim) by
|
||||
simulating the keystrokes Alt, F. >
|
||||
:map <M-Space> :simalt ~<CR>
|
||||
This maps Alt-Space to pop down the system menu for the Vim window. Note that
|
||||
This maps Alt-Space to pop down the system menu for the Vim window. Note that
|
||||
~ is used by simalt to represent the <Space> character. >
|
||||
:map <C-n> :simalt ~n<CR>
|
||||
Maps Control-N to produce the keys Alt-Space followed by N. This minimizes the
|
||||
Maps Control-N to produce the keys Alt-Space followed by N. This minimizes the
|
||||
Vim window via the system menu.
|
||||
|
||||
*intellimouse-wheel-problems*
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*gui_x11.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 29
|
||||
*gui_x11.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ same. Note that some fonts that have the same point size don't have the same
|
||||
pixel size! Additionally, the positioning of the fonts must be the same
|
||||
(ascent and descent). You can check this with "xlsfonts -l {fontname}".
|
||||
|
||||
If any of these things are also set with Vim commands, eg with
|
||||
If any of these things are also set with Vim commands, e.g. with
|
||||
":set guifont=Screen15", then this will override the X resources (currently
|
||||
'guifont' is the only option that is supported).
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*hangulin.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2001 Sep 03
|
||||
*hangulin.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Chi-Deok Hwang and Sung-Hyun Nam
|
||||
@ -7,17 +7,17 @@ Introduction *hangul*
|
||||
------------
|
||||
It is to input hangul, the Korean language, with VIM GUI version.
|
||||
If you have a XIM program, you can use another |+xim| feature.
|
||||
Basically, it is for whom has no XIM program.
|
||||
Basically, it is for anybody who has no XIM program.
|
||||
|
||||
Compile
|
||||
-------
|
||||
Next is a basic option. You can add any other configure option. >
|
||||
Next is a basic option. You can add any other configure option. >
|
||||
|
||||
./configure --with-x --enable-multibyte --enable-fontset --enable-hangulinput
|
||||
|
||||
And you should check the feature.h. If |+hangul_input| feature is enabled
|
||||
And you should check feature.h. If |+hangul_input| feature is enabled
|
||||
by configure, you can select more options such as keyboard type, 2 bulsik
|
||||
or 3 bulsik. You can find keywords like next in there. >
|
||||
or 3 bulsik. You can find keywords like next in there. >
|
||||
|
||||
#define HANGUL_DEFAULT_KEYBOARD 2
|
||||
#define ESC_CHG_TO_ENG_MODE
|
||||
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ You should add nexts to your global vimrc ($HOME/.vimrc). >
|
||||
Keyboard
|
||||
--------
|
||||
You can change keyboard type (2 bulsik or 3 bulsik) using VIM_KEYBOARD
|
||||
or HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE environment variables. For sh, just do (2 bulsik): >
|
||||
or HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE environment variables. For sh, just do (2 bulsik): >
|
||||
|
||||
export VIM_KEYBOARD="2"
|
||||
or >
|
||||
@ -67,9 +67,9 @@ $HOME/.gvimrc: >
|
||||
|
||||
attention! the , (comma) or ; (semicolon)
|
||||
|
||||
And there should be no ':set guifont'. If it exists, then Gvim ignores
|
||||
':set guifontset'. It means VIM runs without fontset supporting.
|
||||
So, you can see only English. Hangul does not be correctly displayed.
|
||||
And there should be no ':set guifont'. If it exists, then Gvim ignores
|
||||
':set guifontset'. It means VIM runs without fontset supporting.
|
||||
So, you can see only English. Hangul does not be correctly displayed.
|
||||
|
||||
After 'fontset' feature is enabled, VIM does not allow using 'font'.
|
||||
For example, if you use >
|
||||
@ -78,17 +78,17 @@ in your .gvimrc, then you should do for syntax >
|
||||
:hi Comment guifg=Cyan font=another_eng_font,another_your_font
|
||||
If you just do >
|
||||
:hi Comment font=another_eng_font
|
||||
then you can see a GOOD error message. Be careful!
|
||||
then you can see a GOOD error message. Be careful!
|
||||
|
||||
hangul_font width should be twice than english_font width.
|
||||
|
||||
Unsupported Feature
|
||||
-------------------
|
||||
Johab font not yet supported. And I don't have any plan.
|
||||
Johab font not yet supported. And I don't have any plan.
|
||||
If you really want to use johab font, you can use the
|
||||
hanguldraw.c in gau package.
|
||||
|
||||
Hanja input not yet supported. And I don't have any plan.
|
||||
Hanja input not yet supported. And I don't have any plan.
|
||||
If you really want to input hanja, just use VIM with hanterm.
|
||||
|
||||
Bug or Comment
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_cscop.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Oct 21
|
||||
*if_cscop.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Andy Kahn
|
||||
@ -239,12 +239,12 @@ started will have no effect!
|
||||
*cscopequickfix* *csqf* *E469*
|
||||
{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| feature}
|
||||
'cscopequickfix' specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope
|
||||
results. This is a list of comma-separated values. Each item consists of
|
||||
results. This is a list of comma-separated values. Each item consists of
|
||||
|cscope-find| command (s, g, d, c, t, e, f or i) and flag (+, - or 0).
|
||||
'+' indicates that results must be appended to quickfix window,
|
||||
'-' implies previous results clearance, '0' or command absence - don't use
|
||||
quickfix. Search is performed from start until first command occurrence.
|
||||
The default value is "" (don't use quickfix anyway). The following value
|
||||
quickfix. Search is performed from start until first command occurrence.
|
||||
The default value is "" (don't use quickfix anyway). The following value
|
||||
seems to be useful: >
|
||||
:set cscopequickfix=s-,c-,d-,i-,t-,e-
|
||||
<
|
||||
@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ cscope within Vim to him.
|
||||
*cscope-win32*
|
||||
For a cscope version for Win32 see: http://iamphet.nm.ru/cscope/index.html
|
||||
|
||||
Win32 support was added by Sergey Khorev <sergey.khorev@gmail.com>. Contact
|
||||
Win32 support was added by Sergey Khorev <sergey.khorev@gmail.com>. Contact
|
||||
him if you have Win32-specific issues.
|
||||
|
||||
vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_ole.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 09
|
||||
*if_ole.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Paul Moore
|
||||
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ An alternative is using the client-server communication |clientserver|.
|
||||
1. Activation *ole-activation*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim acts as an OLE automation server, accessible from any automation client,
|
||||
for example, Visual Basic, Python, or Perl. The Vim application "name" (its
|
||||
for example, Visual Basic, Python, or Perl. The Vim application "name" (its
|
||||
"ProgID", in OLE terminology) is "Vim.Application".
|
||||
|
||||
Hence, in order to start a Vim instance (or connect to an already running
|
||||
@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ instance), code similar to the following should be used:
|
||||
$vim = new Win32::OLE 'Vim.Application';
|
||||
|
||||
Vim does not support acting as a "hidden" OLE server, like some other OLE
|
||||
Automation servers. When a client starts up an instance of Vim, that instance
|
||||
is immediately visible. Simply closing the OLE connection to the Vim instance
|
||||
Automation servers. When a client starts up an instance of Vim, that instance
|
||||
is immediately visible. Simply closing the OLE connection to the Vim instance
|
||||
is not enough to shut down the Vim instance - it is necessary to explicitly
|
||||
execute a quit command (for example, :qa!, :wqa).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -54,17 +54,17 @@ Vim exposes four methods for use by clients.
|
||||
*ole-sendkeys*
|
||||
SendKeys(keys) Execute a series of keys.
|
||||
|
||||
This method takes a single parameter, which is a string of keystrokes. These
|
||||
This method takes a single parameter, which is a string of keystrokes. These
|
||||
keystrokes are executed exactly as if they had been types in at the keyboard.
|
||||
Special keys can be given using their <..> names, as for the right hand side
|
||||
of a mapping. Note: Execution of the Ex "normal" command is not supported -
|
||||
of a mapping. Note: Execution of the Ex "normal" command is not supported -
|
||||
see below |ole-normal|.
|
||||
|
||||
Examples (Visual Basic syntax) >
|
||||
Vim.SendKeys "ihello<Esc>"
|
||||
Vim.SendKeys "ma1GV4jy`a"
|
||||
|
||||
These examples assume that Vim starts in Normal mode. To force Normal mode,
|
||||
These examples assume that Vim starts in Normal mode. To force Normal mode,
|
||||
start the key sequence with CTRL-\ CTRL-N as in >
|
||||
|
||||
Vim.SendKeys "<C-\><C-N>ihello<Esc>"
|
||||
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Example (Visual Basic syntax) >
|
||||
|
||||
Due to the way Vim processes OLE Automation commands, combined with the method
|
||||
of implementation of the ex command :normal, it is not possible to execute the
|
||||
:normal command via OLE automation. Any attempt to do so will fail, probably
|
||||
:normal command via OLE automation. Any attempt to do so will fail, probably
|
||||
harmlessly, although possibly in unpredictable ways.
|
||||
|
||||
There is currently no practical way to trap this situation, and users must
|
||||
@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ simply be aware of the limitation.
|
||||
4. Registration *ole-registration* *E243*
|
||||
|
||||
Before Vim will act as an OLE server, it must be registered in the system
|
||||
registry. In order to do this, Vim should be run with a single parameter of
|
||||
registry. In order to do this, Vim should be run with a single parameter of
|
||||
"-register".
|
||||
*-register* >
|
||||
gvim -register
|
||||
@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ In some situations registering is not possible. This happens when the
|
||||
registry is not writable. If you run into this problem you need to run gvim
|
||||
as "Administrator".
|
||||
|
||||
Once vim is registered, the application path is stored in the registry. Before
|
||||
moving, deleting, or upgrading Vim, the registry entries should be removed
|
||||
using the "-unregister" switch.
|
||||
Once vim is registered, the application path is stored in the registry.
|
||||
Before moving, deleting, or upgrading Vim, the registry entries should be
|
||||
removed using the "-unregister" switch.
|
||||
*-unregister* >
|
||||
gvim -unregister
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_perl.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Aug 30
|
||||
*if_perl.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Sven Verdoolaege
|
||||
@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ The Perl interface only works when Vim was compiled with the |+perl| feature.
|
||||
1. Editing Perl files *perl-editing*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim syntax highlighting supports Perl and POD files. Vim assumes a file is
|
||||
Perl code if the filename has a .pl or .pm suffix. Vim also examines the first
|
||||
Perl code if the filename has a .pl or .pm suffix. Vim also examines the first
|
||||
line of a file, regardless of the filename suffix, to check if a file is a
|
||||
Perl script (see scripts.vim in Vim's syntax directory). Vim assumes a file
|
||||
is POD text if the filename has a .POD suffix.
|
||||
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ http://www.perl.com/CPAN/ports/nt/Standard/x86/
|
||||
3. Using the Perl interface *perl-using*
|
||||
|
||||
*:perl* *:pe*
|
||||
:pe[rl] {cmd} Execute Perl command {cmd}. The current package
|
||||
:pe[rl] {cmd} Execute Perl command {cmd}. The current package
|
||||
is "main".
|
||||
|
||||
:pe[rl] << {endpattern}
|
||||
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Example vim script: >
|
||||
*:perldo* *:perld*
|
||||
:[range]perld[o] {cmd} Execute Perl command {cmd} for each line in the
|
||||
[range], with $_ being set to the text of each line in
|
||||
turn, without a trailing <EOL>. Setting $_ will change
|
||||
turn, without a trailing <EOL>. Setting $_ will change
|
||||
the text, but note that it is not possible to add or
|
||||
delete lines using this command.
|
||||
The default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
|
||||
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ Buffer->Count() Returns the number of lines in the Buffer.
|
||||
*perl-Get*
|
||||
Buffer->Get({lnum}, {lnum}?, ...)
|
||||
Returns a text string of line {lnum} in the Buffer
|
||||
for each {lnum} specified. An array can be passed
|
||||
for each {lnum} specified. An array can be passed
|
||||
with a list of {lnum}'s specified.
|
||||
|
||||
*perl-Delete*
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_pyth.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jul 25
|
||||
*if_pyth.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Paul Moore
|
||||
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ just like in the Python interpreter.)
|
||||
2. The vim module *python-vim*
|
||||
|
||||
Python code gets all of its access to vim (with one exception - see
|
||||
|python-output| below) via the "vim" module. The vim module implements two
|
||||
|python-output| below) via the "vim" module. The vim module implements two
|
||||
methods, three constants, and one error object. You need to import the vim
|
||||
module before using it: >
|
||||
:python import vim
|
||||
@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Overview >
|
||||
Methods of the "vim" module
|
||||
|
||||
vim.command(str) *python-command*
|
||||
Executes the vim (ex-mode) command str. Returns None.
|
||||
Executes the vim (ex-mode) command str. Returns None.
|
||||
Examples: >
|
||||
:py vim.command("set tw=72")
|
||||
:py vim.command("%s/aaa/bbb/g")
|
||||
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ vim.command(str) *python-command*
|
||||
|
||||
vim.eval(str) *python-eval*
|
||||
Evaluates the expression str using the vim internal expression
|
||||
evaluator (see |expression|). Returns the expression result as a
|
||||
evaluator (see |expression|). Returns the expression result as a
|
||||
string.
|
||||
Examples: >
|
||||
:py text_width = vim.eval("&tw")
|
||||
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Constants of the "vim" module
|
||||
to which the variables referred.
|
||||
|
||||
vim.buffers *python-buffers*
|
||||
A sequence object providing access to the list of vim buffers. The
|
||||
A sequence object providing access to the list of vim buffers. The
|
||||
object supports the following operations: >
|
||||
:py b = vim.buffers[i] # Indexing (read-only)
|
||||
:py b in vim.buffers # Membership test
|
||||
@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ vim.buffers *python-buffers*
|
||||
:py for b in vim.buffers: # Sequential access
|
||||
<
|
||||
vim.windows *python-windows*
|
||||
A sequence object providing access to the list of vim windows. The
|
||||
A sequence object providing access to the list of vim windows. The
|
||||
object supports the following operations: >
|
||||
:py w = vim.windows[i] # Indexing (read-only)
|
||||
:py w in vim.windows # Membership test
|
||||
@ -179,10 +179,10 @@ vim.current *python-current*
|
||||
vim.current.window The current window (RO) Window
|
||||
vim.current.range The current line range (RO) Range
|
||||
|
||||
The last case deserves a little explanation. When the :python or
|
||||
The last case deserves a little explanation. When the :python or
|
||||
:pyfile command specifies a range, this range of lines becomes the
|
||||
"current range". A range is a bit like a buffer, but with all access
|
||||
restricted to a subset of lines. See |python-range| for more details.
|
||||
"current range". A range is a bit like a buffer, but with all access
|
||||
restricted to a subset of lines. See |python-range| for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Output from Python *python-output*
|
||||
@ -197,31 +197,31 @@ Output from Python *python-output*
|
||||
|
||||
*python-input*
|
||||
Input (via sys.stdin, including input() and raw_input()) is not
|
||||
supported, and may cause the program to crash. This should probably be
|
||||
supported, and may cause the program to crash. This should probably be
|
||||
fixed.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
3. Buffer objects *python-buffer*
|
||||
|
||||
Buffer objects represent vim buffers. You can obtain them in a number of ways:
|
||||
Buffer objects represent vim buffers. You can obtain them in a number of ways:
|
||||
- via vim.current.buffer (|python-current|)
|
||||
- from indexing vim.buffers (|python-buffers|)
|
||||
- from the "buffer" attribute of a window (|python-window|)
|
||||
|
||||
Buffer objects have one read-only attribute - name - the full file name for
|
||||
the buffer. They also have three methods (append, mark, and range; see below).
|
||||
the buffer. They also have three methods (append, mark, and range; see below).
|
||||
|
||||
You can also treat buffer objects as sequence objects. In this context, they
|
||||
You can also treat buffer objects as sequence objects. In this context, they
|
||||
act as if they were lists (yes, they are mutable) of strings, with each
|
||||
element being a line of the buffer. All of the usual sequence operations,
|
||||
element being a line of the buffer. All of the usual sequence operations,
|
||||
including indexing, index assignment, slicing and slice assignment, work as
|
||||
you would expect. Note that the result of indexing (slicing) a buffer is a
|
||||
string (list of strings). This has one unusual consequence - b[:] is different
|
||||
from b. In particular, "b[:] = None" deletes the whole of the buffer, whereas
|
||||
you would expect. Note that the result of indexing (slicing) a buffer is a
|
||||
string (list of strings). This has one unusual consequence - b[:] is different
|
||||
from b. In particular, "b[:] = None" deletes the whole of the buffer, whereas
|
||||
"b = None" merely updates the variable b, with no effect on the buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
Buffer indexes start at zero, as is normal in Python. This differs from vim
|
||||
line numbers, which start from 1. This is particularly relevant when dealing
|
||||
Buffer indexes start at zero, as is normal in Python. This differs from vim
|
||||
line numbers, which start from 1. This is particularly relevant when dealing
|
||||
with marks (see below) which use vim line numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
The buffer object methods are:
|
||||
@ -255,12 +255,12 @@ Examples (assume b is the current buffer) >
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
4. Range objects *python-range*
|
||||
|
||||
Range objects represent a part of a vim buffer. You can obtain them in a
|
||||
Range objects represent a part of a vim buffer. You can obtain them in a
|
||||
number of ways:
|
||||
- via vim.current.range (|python-current|)
|
||||
- from a buffer's range() method (|python-buffer|)
|
||||
|
||||
A range object is almost identical in operation to a buffer object. However,
|
||||
A range object is almost identical in operation to a buffer object. However,
|
||||
all operations are restricted to the lines within the range (this line range
|
||||
can, of course, change as a result of slice assignments, line deletions, or
|
||||
the range.append() method).
|
||||
@ -283,11 +283,11 @@ Example (assume r is the current range):
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
5. Window objects *python-window*
|
||||
|
||||
Window objects represent vim windows. You can obtain them in a number of ways:
|
||||
Window objects represent vim windows. You can obtain them in a number of ways:
|
||||
- via vim.current.window (|python-current|)
|
||||
- from indexing vim.windows (|python-windows|)
|
||||
|
||||
You can manipulate window objects only through their attributes. They have no
|
||||
You can manipulate window objects only through their attributes. They have no
|
||||
methods, and no sequence or other interface.
|
||||
|
||||
Window attributes are:
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_ruby.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Mar 14
|
||||
*if_ruby.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Shugo Maeda
|
||||
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ downloading Ruby there.
|
||||
Execute Ruby script {script}.
|
||||
{endpattern} must NOT be preceded by any white space.
|
||||
If {endpattern} is omitted, it defaults to a dot '.'
|
||||
like for the |:append| and |:insert| commands. This
|
||||
like for the |:append| and |:insert| commands. This
|
||||
form of the |:ruby| command is mainly useful for
|
||||
including ruby code in vim scripts.
|
||||
Note: This command doesn't work when the Ruby feature
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Example Vim script: >
|
||||
*:rubydo* *:rubyd* *E265*
|
||||
:[range]rubyd[o] {cmd} Evaluate Ruby command {cmd} for each line in the
|
||||
[range], with $_ being set to the text of each line in
|
||||
turn, without a trailing <EOL>. Setting $_ will change
|
||||
turn, without a trailing <EOL>. Setting $_ will change
|
||||
the text, but note that it is not possible to add or
|
||||
delete lines using this command.
|
||||
The default for [range] is the whole file: "1,$".
|
||||
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ VIM::command({cmd})
|
||||
*ruby-evaluate*
|
||||
VIM::evaluate({expr})
|
||||
Evaluates {expr} using the vim internal expression evaluator (see
|
||||
|expression|). Returns the expression result as a string.
|
||||
|expression|). Returns the expression result as a string.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
3. VIM::Buffer objects *ruby-buffer*
|
||||
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ Class Methods:
|
||||
|
||||
current Returns the current buffer object.
|
||||
count Returns the number of buffers.
|
||||
self[{n}] Returns the buffer object for the number {n}. The first number
|
||||
self[{n}] Returns the buffer object for the number {n}. The first number
|
||||
is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
Methods:
|
||||
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Class Methods:
|
||||
|
||||
current Returns the current window object.
|
||||
count Returns the number of windows.
|
||||
self[{n}] Returns the window object for the number {n}. The first number
|
||||
self[{n}] Returns the window object for the number {n}. The first number
|
||||
is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
Methods:
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_sniff.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2001 Sep 03
|
||||
*if_sniff.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ edit source code. On the other hand, you can send queries to SNiFF+ with the
|
||||
:sni[ff] Display all possible requests and the connection
|
||||
status
|
||||
|
||||
Most requests require a symbol (identifier) as parameter. If it is omitted,
|
||||
Most requests require a symbol (identifier) as parameter. If it is omitted,
|
||||
Vim will use the current word under the cursor.
|
||||
The available requests are listed below:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ request mapping description
|
||||
connect sc Establish connection with SNiFF+.
|
||||
Make sure SNiFF+ is prepared for this in the
|
||||
Preferences
|
||||
disconnect sq Disconnect from SNiFF+. You can reconnect any
|
||||
disconnect sq Disconnect from SNiFF+. You can reconnect any
|
||||
time with :sniff connect (or 'sc')
|
||||
toggle st Toggle between implementation
|
||||
and definition file
|
||||
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ show-docu sd Show documentation of symbol
|
||||
gen-docu sD Generate documentation of symbol
|
||||
|
||||
The mappings are defined in a file 'sniff.vim', which is part of every SNiFF+
|
||||
product ($SNIFF_DIR/config/sniff.vim). This file is sourced whenever Vim
|
||||
product ($SNIFF_DIR/config/sniff.vim). This file is sourced whenever Vim
|
||||
connects to SNiFF+.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*if_tcl.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jan 17
|
||||
*if_tcl.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Ingo Wilken
|
||||
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ comments, ideas etc to <Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de>
|
||||
wasn't compiled in. To avoid errors, see
|
||||
|script-here|.
|
||||
|
||||
{endmarker} must NOT be preceded by any white space. If {endmarker} is
|
||||
{endmarker} must NOT be preceded by any white space. If {endmarker} is
|
||||
omitted from after the "<<", a dot '.' must be used after {script}, like for
|
||||
the |:append| and |:insert| commands.
|
||||
This form of the |:tcl| command is mainly useful for including tcl code in Vim
|
||||
@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Commands:
|
||||
|
||||
::vim::window {option} *tcl-window*
|
||||
Provides access to vim windows. Currently only the "list" option is
|
||||
implemented. This creates a window command (see |tcl-window-cmds|) for
|
||||
implemented. This creates a window command (see |tcl-window-cmds|) for
|
||||
each window, and returns a list of the command names as the result.
|
||||
Example: >
|
||||
set wins [::vim::window list]
|
||||
@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ The ::vim::current(window) variable contains the name of the window command
|
||||
for the current window. A window command is automatically deleted when the
|
||||
corresponding vim window is closed.
|
||||
|
||||
Lets assume the name of the window command is stored in the Tcl variable "win",
|
||||
Let's assume the name of the window command is stored in the Tcl variable "win",
|
||||
i.e. "$win" calls the command. The following options are available: >
|
||||
|
||||
$win buffer # Create Tcl command for window's buffer.
|
||||
@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ changed, all marks in the buffer are automatically adjusted. Any changes to
|
||||
the buffer's contents made by Tcl commands can be undone with the "undo" vim
|
||||
command (see |undo|).
|
||||
|
||||
Lets assume the name of the buffer command is stored in the Tcl variable "buf",
|
||||
Let's assume the name of the buffer command is stored in the Tcl variable "buf",
|
||||
i.e. "$buf" calls the command. The following options are available: >
|
||||
|
||||
$buf append {n} {str} # Append a line to buffer, after line {n}.
|
||||
@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ This procedure runs an ex command on each buffer (idea stolen from Ron Aaron):
|
||||
}
|
||||
Use it like this:
|
||||
:tcl eachbuf %s/foo/bar/g
|
||||
Be careful with Tcl's string and backslash substitution, tough. If in doubt,
|
||||
Be careful with Tcl's string and backslash substitution, tough. If in doubt,
|
||||
surround the ex command with curly braces.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*indent.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 24
|
||||
*indent.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
|
||||
} }
|
||||
<
|
||||
bN If N != 0 Vim will align a final "break" with the case label,
|
||||
so that case..break looks like a sort of block. (default: 0).
|
||||
so that case..break looks like a sort of block. (default: 0).
|
||||
|
||||
cino= cino=b1 >
|
||||
switch (x) switch(x)
|
||||
@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
|
||||
********/ ********/
|
||||
< (Example uses ":set comments& comments-=s1:/* comments^=s0:/*")
|
||||
|
||||
/N Indent comment lines N characters extra. (default 0).
|
||||
/N Indent comment lines N characters extra. (default 0).
|
||||
cino= cino=/4 >
|
||||
a = b; a = b;
|
||||
/* comment */ /* comment */
|
||||
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
|
||||
the last non-white character in its line and it is not the
|
||||
closing parentheses, indent the following line N characters
|
||||
relative to the outer context (i.e. start of the line or the
|
||||
next unclosed parentheses). (default: 0).
|
||||
next unclosed parentheses). (default: 0).
|
||||
|
||||
cino=(0 cino=(0,W4 >
|
||||
a_long_line( a_long_line(
|
||||
@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ assume a 'shiftwidth' of 4.
|
||||
<
|
||||
*java-cinoptions* *java-indenting*
|
||||
jN Indent java anonymous classes correctly. The value 'N' is
|
||||
currently unused but must be non-zero (e.g. 'j1'). 'j1' will
|
||||
currently unused but must be non-zero (e.g. 'j1'). 'j1' will
|
||||
indent for example the following code snippet correctly: >
|
||||
|
||||
object.add(new ChangeListener() {
|
||||
@ -451,31 +451,31 @@ REMARKS ABOUT SPECIFIC INDENT FILES ~
|
||||
|
||||
FORTRAN *fortran-indent*
|
||||
|
||||
Block if, select case, and where constructs are indented. Comments, labelled
|
||||
Block if, select case, and where constructs are indented. Comments, labelled
|
||||
statements and continuation lines are indented if the Fortran is in free
|
||||
source form, whereas they are not indented if the Fortran is in fixed source
|
||||
form because of the left margin requirements. Hence manual indent corrections
|
||||
form because of the left margin requirements. Hence manual indent corrections
|
||||
will be necessary for labelled statements and continuation lines when fixed
|
||||
source form is being used. For further discussion of the method used for the
|
||||
source form is being used. For further discussion of the method used for the
|
||||
detection of source format see |fortran-syntax|.
|
||||
|
||||
Do loops ~
|
||||
All do loops are left unindented by default. Do loops can be unstructured in
|
||||
All do loops are left unindented by default. Do loops can be unstructured in
|
||||
Fortran with (possibly multiple) loops ending on a labelled executable
|
||||
statement of almost arbitrary type. Correct indentation requires
|
||||
compiler-quality parsing. Old code with do loops ending on labelled statements
|
||||
statement of almost arbitrary type. Correct indentation requires
|
||||
compiler-quality parsing. Old code with do loops ending on labelled statements
|
||||
of arbitrary type can be indented with elaborate programs such as Tidy
|
||||
(http://www.unb.ca/chem/ajit/f_tidy.htm). Structured do/continue loops are
|
||||
(http://www.unb.ca/chem/ajit/f_tidy.htm). Structured do/continue loops are
|
||||
also left unindented because continue statements are also used for purposes
|
||||
other than ending a do loop. Programs such as Tidy can convert structured
|
||||
do/continue loops to the do/enddo form. Do loops of the do/enddo variety can
|
||||
be indented. If you use only structured loops of the do/enddo form, you should
|
||||
other than ending a do loop. Programs such as Tidy can convert structured
|
||||
do/continue loops to the do/enddo form. Do loops of the do/enddo variety can
|
||||
be indented. If you use only structured loops of the do/enddo form, you should
|
||||
declare this by setting the fortran_do_enddo variable in your .vimrc as
|
||||
follows >
|
||||
|
||||
let fortran_do_enddo=1
|
||||
|
||||
in which case do loops will be indented. If all your loops are of do/enddo
|
||||
in which case do loops will be indented. If all your loops are of do/enddo
|
||||
type only in, say, .f90 files, then you should set a buffer flag with an
|
||||
autocommand such as >
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*index.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 25
|
||||
*index.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -800,7 +800,7 @@ tag char note action in Normal mode ~
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
3. Visual mode *visual-index*
|
||||
|
||||
Most commands in Visual mode are the same as in Normal mode. The ones listed
|
||||
Most commands in Visual mode are the same as in Normal mode. The ones listed
|
||||
here are those that are different.
|
||||
|
||||
tag command note action in Visual mode ~
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*insert.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 21
|
||||
*insert.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 08
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ CTRL-Q Same as CTRL-V.
|
||||
work then. It does work in the GUI.
|
||||
|
||||
CTRL-X Enter CTRL-X mode. This is a sub-mode where commands can
|
||||
be given to complete words or scroll the window. See
|
||||
be given to complete words or scroll the window. See
|
||||
|i_CTRL-X| and |ins-completion|. {not in Vi}
|
||||
|
||||
*i_CTRL-E*
|
||||
@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ entered directly. This way you can enter any character, except a line break
|
||||
|
||||
first char mode max nr of chars max value ~
|
||||
(none) decimal 3 255
|
||||
o or O octal 3 255
|
||||
o or O octal 3 377 (255)
|
||||
x or X hexadecimal 2 ff (255)
|
||||
u hexadecimal 4 ffff (65535)
|
||||
U hexadecimal 8 7fffffff (2147483647)
|
||||
@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ The CTRL-G j and CTRL-G k commands can be used to insert text in front of a
|
||||
column. Example: >
|
||||
int i;
|
||||
int j;
|
||||
Position the cursor on the first "int", type "istatic<C-G>j ". The
|
||||
Position the cursor on the first "int", type "istatic <C-G>j ". The
|
||||
result is: >
|
||||
static int i;
|
||||
int j;
|
||||
@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ CTRL-X CTRL-K Search the files given with the 'dictionary' option
|
||||
keyword replaces the previous matching keyword.
|
||||
|
||||
*i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T*
|
||||
CTRL-X CTRL-T Works as CTRL-X CTRL-K, but in a special way. It uses
|
||||
CTRL-X CTRL-T Works as CTRL-X CTRL-K, but in a special way. It uses
|
||||
the 'thesaurus' option instead of 'dictionary'. If a
|
||||
match is found in the thesaurus file, all the
|
||||
remaining words on the same line are included as
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*map.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 27
|
||||
*map.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ is to define a sequence commands for a function key. Example: >
|
||||
|
||||
:map <F2> a<C-R>=strftime("%c")<CR><Esc>
|
||||
|
||||
This appends the current date and time after the cursor. (in <> notation |<>|)
|
||||
This appends the current date and time after the cursor (in <> notation |<>|).
|
||||
|
||||
There are commands to enter new mappings, remove mappings and list mappings.
|
||||
See |map-overview| for the various forms of "map" and their relationships with
|
||||
@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ There are five sets of mappings
|
||||
- For Visual mode: When typing commands while the Visual area is highlighted.
|
||||
- For Operator-pending mode: When an operator is pending (after "d", "y", "c",
|
||||
etc.). Example: ":omap { w" makes "y{" work like "yw" and "d{" like "dw".
|
||||
- For Insert mode. These are also used in Replace mode.
|
||||
- For Insert mode. These are also used in Replace mode.
|
||||
- For Command-line mode: When entering a ":" or "/" command.
|
||||
|
||||
There are no separate mappings for Select mode. The same as for Visual mode
|
||||
@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ feature}.
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
4. User-defined commands *user-commands*
|
||||
|
||||
It is possible to define your own Ex commands. A user-defined command can act
|
||||
It is possible to define your own Ex commands. A user-defined command can act
|
||||
just like a built-in command (it can have a range or arguments, arguments can
|
||||
be completed as filenames or buffer names, etc), except that when the command
|
||||
is executed, it is transformed into a normal ex command and then executed.
|
||||
@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ For starters: See section |40.2| in the user manual.
|
||||
|
||||
*E183* *user-cmd-ambiguous*
|
||||
All user defined commands must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid
|
||||
confusion with builtin commands. (There are a few builtin commands, notably
|
||||
confusion with builtin commands. (There are a few builtin commands, notably
|
||||
:Next, :Print and :X, which do start with an uppercase letter. The builtin
|
||||
will always take precedence in these cases). The other characters of the user
|
||||
command can be uppercase letters, lowercase letters or digits. When using
|
||||
@ -829,8 +829,8 @@ ambiguous. For example, the command ":Cc2" could be the user command ":Cc2"
|
||||
without an argument, or the command ":Cc" with argument "2". It is advised to
|
||||
put a space between the command name and the argument to avoid these problems.
|
||||
|
||||
When using a user-defined command, the command can be abbreviated. However, if
|
||||
an abbreviation is not unique, an error will be issued. Furthermore, a
|
||||
When using a user-defined command, the command can be abbreviated. However, if
|
||||
an abbreviation is not unique, an error will be issued. Furthermore, a
|
||||
built-in command will always take precedence.
|
||||
|
||||
Example: >
|
||||
@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ It is recommended that full names for user-defined commands are used in
|
||||
scripts.
|
||||
|
||||
:com[mand] *:com* *:command*
|
||||
List all user-defined commands. When listing commands,
|
||||
List all user-defined commands. When listing commands,
|
||||
the characters in the first two columns are
|
||||
! Command has the -bang attribute
|
||||
" Command has the -register attribute
|
||||
@ -858,8 +858,8 @@ scripts.
|
||||
*E174* *E182*
|
||||
:com[mand][!] [{attr}...] {cmd} {rep}
|
||||
Define a user command. The name of the command is
|
||||
{cmd} and its replacement text is {rep}. The command's
|
||||
attributes (see below) are {attr}. If the command
|
||||
{cmd} and its replacement text is {rep}. The command's
|
||||
attributes (see below) are {attr}. If the command
|
||||
already exists, an error is reported, unless a ! is
|
||||
specified, in which case the command is redefined.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -871,20 +871,20 @@ scripts.
|
||||
|
||||
Command attributes
|
||||
|
||||
User-defined commands are treated by Vim just like any other ex commands. They
|
||||
can have arguments, or have a range specified. Arguments are subject to
|
||||
completion as filenames, buffers, etc. Exactly how this works depends upon the
|
||||
User-defined commands are treated by Vim just like any other ex commands. They
|
||||
can have arguments, or have a range specified. Arguments are subject to
|
||||
completion as filenames, buffers, etc. Exactly how this works depends upon the
|
||||
command's attributes, which are specified when the command is defined.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of attributes, split into four categories: argument
|
||||
handling, completion behavior, range handling, and special cases. The
|
||||
handling, completion behavior, range handling, and special cases. The
|
||||
attributes are described below, by category.
|
||||
|
||||
Argument handling *E175* *E176*
|
||||
|
||||
By default, a user defined command will take no arguments (and an error is
|
||||
reported if any are supplied). However, it is possible to specify that the
|
||||
command can take arguments, using the -nargs attribute. Valid cases are:
|
||||
reported if any are supplied). However, it is possible to specify that the
|
||||
command can take arguments, using the -nargs attribute. Valid cases are:
|
||||
|
||||
-nargs=0 No arguments are allowed (the default)
|
||||
-nargs=1 Exactly one argument is required
|
||||
@ -961,11 +961,11 @@ The following example lists user names to a Finger command >
|
||||
|
||||
Range handling *E177* *E178*
|
||||
|
||||
By default, user-defined commands do not accept a line number range. However,
|
||||
By default, user-defined commands do not accept a line number range. However,
|
||||
it is possible to specify that the command does take a range (the -range
|
||||
attribute), or that it takes an arbitrary count value, either in the line
|
||||
number position (-range=N, like the |:split| command) or as a "count"
|
||||
argument (-count=N, like the |:Next| command). Possible attributes are:
|
||||
argument (-count=N, like the |:Next| command). Possible attributes are:
|
||||
|
||||
-range Range allowed, default is current line
|
||||
-range=% Range allowed, default is whole file (1,$)
|
||||
@ -997,9 +997,9 @@ replacement text separately.
|
||||
Replacement text
|
||||
|
||||
The replacement text for a user defined command is scanned for special escape
|
||||
sequences, using <...> notation. Escape sequences are replaced with values
|
||||
from the entered command line, and all other text is copied unchanged. The
|
||||
resulting string is executed as an Ex command. If the initial < of an escape
|
||||
sequences, using <...> notation. Escape sequences are replaced with values
|
||||
from the entered command line, and all other text is copied unchanged. The
|
||||
resulting string is executed as an Ex command. If the initial < of an escape
|
||||
sequence is preceded by a backslash, the sequence is copied unchanged.
|
||||
|
||||
The valid escape sequences are
|
||||
@ -1017,7 +1017,7 @@ The valid escape sequences are
|
||||
expands to nothing.
|
||||
*<reg>* *<register>*
|
||||
<reg> (See the '-register' attribute) The optional register,
|
||||
if specified. Otherwise, expands to nothing. <register>
|
||||
if specified. Otherwise, expands to nothing. <register>
|
||||
is a synonym for this.
|
||||
*<args>*
|
||||
<args> The command arguments, exactly as supplied (but as
|
||||
@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ If the first two characters of an escape sequence are "q-" (for example,
|
||||
for use in an expression. This uses the argument as one single value.
|
||||
|
||||
To allow commands to pass their arguments on to a user-defined function, there
|
||||
is a special form <f-args> ("function args"). This splits the command
|
||||
is a special form <f-args> ("function args"). This splits the command
|
||||
arguments at spaces and Tabs, quotes each argument individually, and the
|
||||
<f-args> sequence is replaced by the comma-separated list of quoted arguments.
|
||||
See the Mycmd example below. When there is no argument, <f-args> also has no
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*mbyte.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 13
|
||||
*mbyte.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar et al.
|
||||
@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Useful utilities for converting the charset:
|
||||
ftp://ftp.cuhk.hk/pub/chinese/ifcss/software/unix/convert/hc-30.tar.gz
|
||||
|
||||
Korean: hmconv
|
||||
Hmconv is Korean code conversion utility especially for E-mail. It can
|
||||
Hmconv is Korean code conversion utility especially for E-mail. It can
|
||||
convert between EUC-KR and ISO-2022-KR. Hmconv can be found at:
|
||||
ftp://ftp.kaist.ac.kr/pub/hangul/code/hmconv/
|
||||
|
||||
@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ Useful utilities for converting the charset:
|
||||
Lv is a Powerful Multilingual File Viewer. And it can be worked as
|
||||
|charset| converter. Supported |charset|: ISO-2022-CN, ISO-2022-JP,
|
||||
ISO-2022-KR, EUC-CN, EUC-JP, EUC-KR, EUC-TW, UTF-7, UTF-8, ISO-8859
|
||||
series, Shift_JIS, Big5 and HZ. Lv can be found at:
|
||||
series, Shift_JIS, Big5 and HZ. Lv can be found at:
|
||||
http://www.ff.iij4u.or.jp/~nrt/freeware/lv4495.tar.gz
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ Now start xterm with >
|
||||
or, for bigger character: >
|
||||
xterm -u8 -fn -misc-fixed-medium-r-normal--15-140-75-75-c-90-iso10646-1
|
||||
|
||||
and you will have a working UTF-8 terminal emulator. Try both >
|
||||
and you will have a working UTF-8 terminal emulator. Try both >
|
||||
|
||||
cat utf-8-demo.txt
|
||||
vim utf-8-demo.txt
|
||||
@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ is suitable for complex input, such as CJK.
|
||||
number of Hira-gana characters are 76. So, first, we pre-input text as
|
||||
pronounced in Hira-gana, second, we convert Hira-gana to Kanji or Kata-Kana,
|
||||
if needed. There are some Kana-Kanji conversion server: jserver
|
||||
(distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna. Canna could be found at:
|
||||
(distributed with Wnn, see below) and canna. Canna could be found at:
|
||||
ftp://ftp.nec.co.jp/pub/Canna/ (no longer works).
|
||||
|
||||
There is a good input system: Wnn4.2. Wnn 4.2 contains,
|
||||
@ -801,7 +801,7 @@ Use the RPM or port for your system.
|
||||
Preedit Area and Status Area are performed by the client application in
|
||||
the area of application. The client application is directed by the
|
||||
|IM-server| to display all pre-edit data at the location of text
|
||||
insertion. The client registers callbacks invoked by the input method
|
||||
insertion. The client registers callbacks invoked by the input method
|
||||
during pre-editing.
|
||||
*. over-the-spot *OverTheSpot*
|
||||
Status Area is created in a fixed position within the area of application,
|
||||
@ -1231,7 +1231,7 @@ is no longer relevant in the GTK+ 2 GUI.
|
||||
Up to two combining characters can be used. The combining character is drawn
|
||||
on top of the preceding character. When editing text a composing character is
|
||||
mostly considered part of the preceding character. For example "x" will
|
||||
delete a character and its following composing characters by default. If the
|
||||
delete a character and its following composing characters by default. If the
|
||||
'delcombine' option is on, then pressing 'x' will delete the combining
|
||||
characters, one at a time, then the base character. But when inserting, you
|
||||
type the first character and the following composing characters separately,
|
||||
@ -1253,7 +1253,7 @@ characters present in the selected font.
|
||||
|
||||
Useful commands:
|
||||
- "ga" shows the decimal, hexadecimal and octal value of the character under
|
||||
the cursor. If there are composing characters these are shown too. (if the
|
||||
the cursor. If there are composing characters these are shown too. (If the
|
||||
message is truncated, use ":messages").
|
||||
- "g8" shows the bytes used in a UTF-8 character, also the composing
|
||||
characters, as hex numbers.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*motion.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 08
|
||||
*motion.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ and end position. Generally, motions that move between lines affect lines
|
||||
characterwise). However, there are some exceptions.
|
||||
|
||||
*exclusive* *inclusive*
|
||||
A character motion is either inclusive or exclusive. When inclusive, the start
|
||||
A character motion is either inclusive or exclusive. When inclusive, the start
|
||||
and end position of the motion are included in the operation. When exclusive,
|
||||
the last character towards the end of the buffer is not included. Linewise
|
||||
motions always include the start and end position.
|
||||
@ -1061,7 +1061,7 @@ g; Go to [count] older position in change list.
|
||||
|
||||
*g,* *E663*
|
||||
g, Go to [count] newer cursor position in change list.
|
||||
Just like "g;| but in the opposite direction.
|
||||
Just like |g;| but in the opposite direction.
|
||||
(not a motion command)
|
||||
{not in Vi}
|
||||
{not available without the +jumplist feature}
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*netbeans.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Jan 31
|
||||
*netbeans.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Gordon Prieur
|
||||
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Visit http://www.sun.com for more information regarding the Sun ONE Studio
|
||||
product line.
|
||||
|
||||
Current releases of NetBeans provide full support for Java and limited support
|
||||
for C, C++, and Fortran. Current releases of Sun ONE Studio provide full
|
||||
for C, C++, and Fortran. Current releases of Sun ONE Studio provide full
|
||||
support for Java, C, C++, and Fortran.
|
||||
|
||||
The interface to NetBeans is also supported by Agide, the A-A-P GUI IDE.
|
||||
@ -50,12 +50,12 @@ See the A-A-P website for information: http://www.A-A-P.org.
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
2. NetBeans Key Bindings *netbeans-keybindings*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim understands a number of key bindings that execute NetBeans commands. These
|
||||
are typically all the Function key combinations. To execute a NetBeans command,
|
||||
the user must press the Pause key followed by a NetBeans key binding. For
|
||||
example, in order to compile a Java file, the NetBeans key binding is "F9". So,
|
||||
while in vim, press "Pause F9" to compile a java file. To toggle a breakpoint
|
||||
at the current line, press "Pause Shift F8".
|
||||
Vim understands a number of key bindings that execute NetBeans commands.
|
||||
These are typically all the Function key combinations. To execute a NetBeans
|
||||
command, the user must press the Pause key followed by a NetBeans key binding.
|
||||
For example, in order to compile a Java file, the NetBeans key binding is
|
||||
"F9". So, while in vim, press "Pause F9" to compile a java file. To toggle a
|
||||
breakpoint at the current line, press "Pause Shift F8".
|
||||
|
||||
The Pause key is Function key 21. If you don't have a working Pause key and
|
||||
want to use F8 instead, use: >
|
||||
@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ In case you do not want the NetBeans interface you can disable it by
|
||||
uncommenting a line with "--disable-netbeans" in the Makefile.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently, only gvim is supported in this integration as NetBeans does not
|
||||
have means to supply a terminal emulator for the vim command. Furthermore,
|
||||
have means to supply a terminal emulator for the vim command. Furthermore,
|
||||
there is only GUI support for GTK, GNOME, and Motif.
|
||||
|
||||
If Motif support is required the user must supply XPM libraries. See
|
||||
If Motif support is required the user must supply XPM libraries. See
|
||||
|workshop-xpm| for details on obtaining the latest version of XPM.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -99,45 +99,45 @@ XPM by yourself or use precompiled libraries from http://iamphet.nm.ru/misc/
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
4. Downloading NetBeans *netbeans-download*
|
||||
|
||||
The NetBeans IDE is available for download from netbeans.org. You can download
|
||||
The NetBeans IDE is available for download from netbeans.org. You can download
|
||||
a released version, download sources, or use CVS to download the current
|
||||
source tree. If you choose to download sources, follow directions from
|
||||
source tree. If you choose to download sources, follow directions from
|
||||
netbeans.org on building NetBeans.
|
||||
|
||||
Depending on the version of NetBeans you download, you may need to do further
|
||||
work to get the required External Editor module. This is the module which lets
|
||||
NetBeans work with gvim (or xemacs :-). See http://externaleditor.netbeans.org
|
||||
work to get the required External Editor module. This is the module which lets
|
||||
NetBeans work with gvim (or xemacs :-). See http://externaleditor.netbeans.org
|
||||
for details on downloading this module if your NetBeans release does not have
|
||||
it.
|
||||
|
||||
For C, C++, and Fortran support you will also need the cpp module. See
|
||||
For C, C++, and Fortran support you will also need the cpp module. See
|
||||
http://cpp.netbeans.org for information regarding this module.
|
||||
|
||||
You can also download Sun ONE Studio from Sun Microsystems, Inc for a 30 day
|
||||
free trial. See http://www.sun.com for further details.
|
||||
free trial. See http://www.sun.com for further details.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
5. Preparing NetBeans for Vim *netbeans-preparation*
|
||||
|
||||
In order for NetBeans to work with vim, the NetBeans External Editor module
|
||||
must be loaded and enabled. If you have a Sun ONE Studio Enterprise Edition
|
||||
then this module should be loaded and enabled. If you have a NetBeans release
|
||||
must be loaded and enabled. If you have a Sun ONE Studio Enterprise Edition
|
||||
then this module should be loaded and enabled. If you have a NetBeans release
|
||||
you may need to find another way of obtaining this open source module.
|
||||
|
||||
You can check if you have this module by opening the Tools->Options dialog
|
||||
and drilling down to the "Modules" list (IDE Configuration->System->Modules).
|
||||
If your Modules list has an entry for "External Editor" you must make sure
|
||||
it is enabled (the "Enabled" property should have the value "True"). If your
|
||||
it is enabled (the "Enabled" property should have the value "True"). If your
|
||||
Modules list has no External Editor see the next section on |obtaining-exted|.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
6. Obtaining the External Editor Module *obtaining-exted*
|
||||
|
||||
There are 2 ways of obtaining the External Editor module. The easiest way
|
||||
There are 2 ways of obtaining the External Editor module. The easiest way
|
||||
is to use the NetBeans Update Center to download and install the module.
|
||||
Unfortunately, some versions do not have this module in their update
|
||||
center. If you cannot download via the update center you will need to
|
||||
download sources and build the module. I will try and get the module
|
||||
center. If you cannot download via the update center you will need to
|
||||
download sources and build the module. I will try and get the module
|
||||
available from the NetBeans Update Center so building will be unnecessary.
|
||||
Also check http://externaleditor.netbeans.org for other availability options.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -152,22 +152,22 @@ Assuming you have loaded and enabled the NetBeans External Editor module
|
||||
as described in |netbeans-preparation| all you need to do is verify that
|
||||
the gvim command line is properly configured for your environment.
|
||||
|
||||
Open the Tools->Options dialog and open the Editing category. Select the
|
||||
External Editor. The right hand pane should contain a Properties tab and
|
||||
an Expert tab. In the Properties tab make sure the "Editor Type" is set
|
||||
to "Vim". In the Expert tab make sure the "Vim Command" is correct.
|
||||
Open the Tools->Options dialog and open the Editing category. Select the
|
||||
External Editor. The right hand pane should contain a Properties tab and
|
||||
an Expert tab. In the Properties tab make sure the "Editor Type" is set
|
||||
to "Vim". In the Expert tab make sure the "Vim Command" is correct.
|
||||
|
||||
You should be careful if you change the "Vim Command". There are command
|
||||
You should be careful if you change the "Vim Command". There are command
|
||||
line options there which must be there for the connection to be properly
|
||||
set up. You can change the command name but thats about it. If your gvim
|
||||
can be found by your $PATH then the VIM Command can start with "gvim". If
|
||||
set up. You can change the command name but that's about it. If your gvim
|
||||
can be found by your $PATH then the VIM Command can start with "gvim". If
|
||||
you don't want gvim searched from your $PATH then hard code in the full
|
||||
Unix path name. At this point you should get a gvim for any source file
|
||||
Unix path name. At this point you should get a gvim for any source file
|
||||
you open in NetBeans.
|
||||
|
||||
If some files come up in gvim and others (with different file suffixes) come
|
||||
up in the default NetBeans editor you should verify the MIME type in the
|
||||
Expert tab MIME Type property. NetBeans is MIME oriented and the External
|
||||
Expert tab MIME Type property. NetBeans is MIME oriented and the External
|
||||
Editor will only open MIME types specified in this property.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ Partial writes disallowed for NetBeans buffers
|
||||
NetBeans connection lost for this buffer
|
||||
NetBeans has become confused about the state of this file.
|
||||
Rather than risc data corruption, NetBeans has severed the
|
||||
connection for this file. Vim will take over responsibility
|
||||
connection for this file. Vim will take over responsibility
|
||||
for saving changes to this file and NetBeans will no longer
|
||||
know of these changes.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ NetBeans (see http://externaleditor.netbeans.org). Later it was extended to
|
||||
work with Agide (A-A-P GUI IDE, see http://www.a-a-p.org). The extensions are
|
||||
marked with "version 2.1".
|
||||
|
||||
Version 2.2 of the protocol has several minor changes which should only
|
||||
affect NetBeans users (ie, not Agide users). However, a bug was fixed which
|
||||
could cause confusion. The netbeans_saved() function sent a "save" protocol
|
||||
command. In protocol version 2.1 and earlier this was incorrectly interpreted
|
||||
as a notification that a write had taken place. In reality, it told NetBeans
|
||||
to save the file so multiple writes were being done. This caused various
|
||||
problems and has been fixed in 2.2. To decrease the likelihood of this
|
||||
Version 2.2 of the protocol has several minor changes which should only affect
|
||||
NetBeans users (ie, not Agide users). However, a bug was fixed which could
|
||||
cause confusion. The netbeans_saved() function sent a "save" protocol
|
||||
command. In protocol version 2.1 and earlier this was incorrectly interpreted
|
||||
as a notification that a write had taken place. In reality, it told NetBeans
|
||||
to save the file so multiple writes were being done. This caused various
|
||||
problems and has been fixed in 2.2. To decrease the likelihood of this
|
||||
confusion happening again, netbeans_saved() has been renamed to
|
||||
netbeans_save_buffer().
|
||||
|
||||
@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ initDone Mark the buffer as ready for use. Implicitly makes the buffer
|
||||
|
||||
insertDone
|
||||
Sent by NetBeans to tell vim an initial file insert is done.
|
||||
This triggers a read message being printed. Prior to version
|
||||
This triggers a read message being printed. Prior to version
|
||||
2.3, no read messages were displayed after opening a file.
|
||||
New in version 2.3.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -466,8 +466,8 @@ save Save the buffer when it was modified. The other side of the
|
||||
New in version 2.2.
|
||||
|
||||
saveDone
|
||||
Sent by NetBeans to tell vim a save is done. This triggers
|
||||
a save message being printed. Prior to version 2.3, no save
|
||||
Sent by NetBeans to tell vim a save is done. This triggers
|
||||
a save message being printed. Prior to version 2.3, no save
|
||||
messages were displayed after a save.
|
||||
New in version 2.3.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ showBalloon text
|
||||
|
||||
specialKeys
|
||||
Map a set of keys (mostly function keys) to be passed back
|
||||
to NetBeans for processing. This lets NetBeans hotkeys be
|
||||
to NetBeans for processing. This lets NetBeans hotkeys be
|
||||
used from vim.
|
||||
Implemented in version 2.3.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ buttonRelease button lnum col
|
||||
at the time of the release. Only for buffers that are owned
|
||||
by NetBeans. This event is not sent if the button was
|
||||
released while the mouse was in the status line or in a
|
||||
separator line. If col is less than 1 the button release was
|
||||
separator line. If col is less than 1 the button release was
|
||||
in the sign area.
|
||||
New in version 2.2.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -772,8 +772,8 @@ REJECT Not used.
|
||||
*:nbkey*
|
||||
:nbkey key Pass the key to NetBeans for processing
|
||||
|
||||
Pass the key to NetBeans for hot-key processing. You should not need to use
|
||||
this command directly. However, NetBeans passes a list of hot-keys to Vim at
|
||||
Pass the key to NetBeans for hot-key processing. You should not need to use
|
||||
this command directly. However, NetBeans passes a list of hot-keys to Vim at
|
||||
startup and when one of these keys is pressed, this command is generated to
|
||||
send the key press back to NetBeans.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 28
|
||||
*options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 14
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -3209,8 +3209,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
||||
|
||||
't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
|
||||
GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
|
||||
'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
|
||||
Athena GUIs.
|
||||
'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon
|
||||
and Athena GUIs.
|
||||
|
||||
'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
||||
'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
||||
@ -5060,7 +5060,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
||||
feature}
|
||||
{not in Vi}
|
||||
This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
|
||||
'scrollbind' windows should behave.
|
||||
'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
|
||||
Options.
|
||||
The following words are available:
|
||||
ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
||||
hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
||||
@ -5631,7 +5632,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
||||
{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
||||
feature}
|
||||
When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|.
|
||||
The languages used are specified with 'spelllang'.
|
||||
The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
|
||||
|
||||
*'spelllang'* *'spl'*
|
||||
'spelllang' 'spl' string (default empty)
|
||||
@ -5644,8 +5645,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
||||
set spelllang=en_us,nl
|
||||
< This means both US English and Dutch words are recognized. Words that
|
||||
are not recognized will be highlighted.
|
||||
When 'encoding' is set the word lists are loaded again. Thus it's a
|
||||
good idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding'.
|
||||
When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good
|
||||
idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding'.
|
||||
More info at |spell|.
|
||||
|
||||
*'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_390.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2003 Jun 03
|
||||
*os_390.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Ralf Schandl
|
||||
@ -12,17 +12,17 @@ This file contains the particulars for the z/OS UNIX version of Vim.
|
||||
4. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts |zOS-has-ebcdic|
|
||||
5. XTerm Problems |zOS-xterm|
|
||||
6. Motif Problems |zOS-Motif|
|
||||
7 Bugs |zOS-Bugs|
|
||||
7. Bugs |zOS-Bugs|
|
||||
8. Known weaknesses |zOS-weaknesses|
|
||||
9. Changes |zOS-changes|
|
||||
|
||||
DISCLAIMER: ~
|
||||
We are IBM employees, but IBM is not responsible for this port. This is our
|
||||
We are IBM employees, but IBM is not responsible for this port. This is our
|
||||
private fun, and is provided in the hopes that it may be useful to others.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that this software has NOT been submitted to any formal IBM
|
||||
testing and is published AS IS. Please do not contact IBM for support for this
|
||||
software, as it is not an official component of any IBM product. IT IS NOT
|
||||
testing and is published AS IS. Please do not contact IBM for support for this
|
||||
software, as it is not an official component of any IBM product. IT IS NOT
|
||||
SUPPORTED, GUARANTEED, OR RELATED WHATSOEVER TO IBM.
|
||||
|
||||
Contributors: ~
|
||||
@ -60,22 +60,22 @@ Vim should compile, link, and run right out of the box on a standard IBM z/OS
|
||||
UNIX mainframe. I've personally run it on z/OS V1R2 and V1R3 machines without
|
||||
problems.
|
||||
|
||||
Many changes had to be done to the code to port Vim to z/OS UNIX. As like
|
||||
most UNIX programs, Vim contained heavy ASCII dependencies. I might have
|
||||
Many changes had to be done to the code to port Vim to z/OS UNIX. As like
|
||||
most UNIX programs, Vim contained heavy ASCII dependencies. I might have
|
||||
missed an ASCII dependency, or it is possible that a new one has been added
|
||||
with a feature or bug fix. Most programmers are simply not aware of possible
|
||||
ASCII/EBCDIC conversion issues. If you hit a problem that seems related to
|
||||
with a feature or bug fix. Most programmers are simply not aware of possible
|
||||
ASCII/EBCDIC conversion issues. If you hit a problem that seems related to
|
||||
this, feel free to contact us at the email addresses above.
|
||||
|
||||
One indication of ASCII/EBCDIC conversion problems is screen corruption with
|
||||
"unprintable" characters. For example, at one point the errorbell was broken
|
||||
in Vim. Any time Vim tried to ring the terminal bell an ASCII character 0x07
|
||||
would be printed. This works fine on most terminals, but is broken on an
|
||||
EBCDIC one. The correct solution was to define a different value for the bell
|
||||
in Vim. Any time Vim tried to ring the terminal bell an ASCII character 0x07
|
||||
would be printed. This works fine on most terminals, but is broken on an
|
||||
EBCDIC one. The correct solution was to define a different value for the bell
|
||||
character on EBCDIC systems.
|
||||
|
||||
Remember, it's only possible to fix a bug if the community knows about it.
|
||||
Don't rely on someone else to report it! See the section |bug-reports|.
|
||||
Don't rely on someone else to report it! See the section |bug-reports|.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
3. Building VIM for z/OS UNIX *OS390-building* *zOS-building*
|
||||
@ -83,12 +83,12 @@ Don't rely on someone else to report it! See the section |bug-reports|.
|
||||
A word on debugging code first: ~
|
||||
|
||||
The normal run of configure adds the flag '-g' to the compiler options,
|
||||
to include debugging information into the executable. This information
|
||||
to include debugging information into the executable. This information
|
||||
are normally removed from the executable with the strip command during
|
||||
installation. On z/OS UNIX, it is not possible to remove this from
|
||||
the executable. The strip command exists on z/OS UNIX and is called
|
||||
installation. On z/OS UNIX, it is not possible to remove this from
|
||||
the executable. The strip command exists on z/OS UNIX and is called
|
||||
during the installation, but it does nothing. It is equivalent to the
|
||||
'touch' command. This is due to the way debug symbols are stored in the
|
||||
'touch' command. This is due to the way debug symbols are stored in the
|
||||
objects generated by the compiler.
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to build Vim without debugging code, export the environment
|
||||
@ -99,11 +99,11 @@ variable CFLAGS set to an empty string before you call the configure script.
|
||||
|
||||
Building without X11: ~
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Use cc to build Vim. The c89 compiler has stricter syntax checking
|
||||
Note: Use cc to build Vim. The c89 compiler has stricter syntax checking
|
||||
and will not compile Vim cleanly.
|
||||
|
||||
If you build VIM without X11 support, compiling and building is
|
||||
straightforward. Don't forget to export _CC_CCMODE=1 before calling
|
||||
straightforward. Don't forget to export _CC_CCMODE=1 before calling
|
||||
configure and make.
|
||||
>
|
||||
$ export _CC_CCMODE=1
|
||||
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ configure and make.
|
||||
Test notes:
|
||||
Test 11 will fail if you do not have gzip installed.
|
||||
Test 42 will fail, as VIM on z/OS UNIX doesn't support the multibyte
|
||||
feature. (David Moore: "Doesn't work _yet_! :-) I'll see what I
|
||||
feature. (David Moore: "Doesn't work _yet_! :-) I'll see what I
|
||||
can do.")
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
@ -123,8 +123,8 @@ configure and make.
|
||||
|
||||
Building with X11: ~
|
||||
|
||||
There are two ways for building Vim with X11 support. You can link it
|
||||
statically with the X11 libraries or can bind it with the X11 DLLs. The
|
||||
There are two ways for building Vim with X11 support. You can link it
|
||||
statically with the X11 libraries or can bind it with the X11 DLLs. The
|
||||
statically linked version results in a huge executable (~13MB), while the
|
||||
dynamically linked executable is much smaller (~4.5MB).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Here is what you do, if you want Motif:
|
||||
VIM is now linked statically with the X11 libraries.
|
||||
|
||||
b) Dynamic link:
|
||||
Make VIM as described for the static link. Then change the contents of
|
||||
Make VIM as described for the static link. Then change the contents of
|
||||
the 'auto/link.sed' file by appending: >
|
||||
s%-lXm *%/usr/lib/Xm.x %g
|
||||
s%-lX11 *%/usr/lib/X11.x %g
|
||||
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ See the Makefile and the file link.sh on how link.sed is used.
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
4. ASCII/EBCDIC dependent scripts *OS390-has-ebcdic* *zOS-has-ebcdic*
|
||||
|
||||
For the internal script language the feature "ebcdic" was added. With this
|
||||
For the internal script language the feature "ebcdic" was added. With this
|
||||
you can fix ASCII dependent scripts like this:
|
||||
>
|
||||
if has("ebcdic")
|
||||
@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ the screen with <C-L> or if you can't move to the left with the cursor key on
|
||||
the command line, try adding >
|
||||
:set t_le=^H
|
||||
<
|
||||
to your .vimrc. Note: '^H' is one character, hit <C-V><C-H> to get it.
|
||||
to your .vimrc. Note: '^H' is one character, hit <C-V><C-H> to get it.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
6. Motif Problems *OS390-Motif* *zOS-Motif*
|
||||
@ -203,9 +203,9 @@ There is no solution for this as of yet.
|
||||
8. Known weaknesses *OS390-weaknesses* *zOS-weaknesses*
|
||||
|
||||
- No binary search in tag files.
|
||||
The program /bin/sort sorts by ASCII value by default. This program is
|
||||
normally used by ctags to sort the tags. There might be a version of
|
||||
ctags out there, that does it right, but we can't be sure. So this seems to
|
||||
The program /bin/sort sorts by ASCII value by default. This program is
|
||||
normally used by ctags to sort the tags. There might be a version of
|
||||
ctags out there, that does it right, but we can't be sure. So this seems to
|
||||
be a permanent restriction.
|
||||
|
||||
- Multibyte support (utf-8) doesn't work, it's disabled at compile time.
|
||||
@ -246,10 +246,10 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
|
||||
screen corruption problems in gVim reported by Anthony Giorgio.
|
||||
|
||||
Anthony Giorgio updated this document:
|
||||
- Changed OS/390 to z/OS where appropriate. IBM decided to rename
|
||||
- Changed OS/390 to z/OS where appropriate. IBM decided to rename
|
||||
all of its servers and operating systems. z/OS and OS/390
|
||||
are the same product, but the version numbering system was
|
||||
reset for the name change. (e.g. OS/390 V2R11 == z/OS V1R1)
|
||||
reset for the name change (e.g. OS/390 V2R11 == z/OS V1R1).
|
||||
- Added information about second edition of the Open Source Redbook.
|
||||
- Moved Redbook information to a separate section.
|
||||
- Various tweaks and changes.
|
||||
@ -265,16 +265,16 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
|
||||
|
||||
6.0q (alpha):
|
||||
Minor changes for nrformats=alpha (see |'nrformats'|).
|
||||
Problem with hard-coded keycode for the English pound sign. Added a define in
|
||||
Problem with hard-coded keycode for the English pound sign. Added a define in
|
||||
ascii.h
|
||||
Disabled multibyte for EBCDIC in feature.h
|
||||
|
||||
6.0f (alpha):
|
||||
First compile of Vim 6 on z/OS UNIX. Some minor changes were needed.
|
||||
First compile of Vim 6 on z/OS UNIX. Some minor changes were needed.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally found the reason why make from the top level didn't work (I must have
|
||||
been blind before!). The Makefile contained a list of targets in one target
|
||||
line. On all other UNIX's the macro $@ evaluates to the first target in this
|
||||
been blind before!). The Makefile contained a list of targets in one target
|
||||
line. On all other UNIX's the macro $@ evaluates to the first target in this
|
||||
list, only on z/OS UNIX it evaluates to the last one :-(.
|
||||
|
||||
5.6-390d:
|
||||
@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
|
||||
|
||||
5.6-390c:
|
||||
I grepped through the source and examined every spot with a character
|
||||
involved in a operation (+-). I hope I now found all EBCDIC/ASCII
|
||||
involved in a operation (+-). I hope I now found all EBCDIC/ASCII
|
||||
stuff, but ....
|
||||
|
||||
Fixed:
|
||||
@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
|
||||
- fixed quick-access table in findoptions()
|
||||
- fixed 'g^H' select mode
|
||||
- fixed tgetstr() 'get terminal capability string', ESC and
|
||||
Ctrl chars where wrong. (Not used on OS/390 UNIX)
|
||||
Ctrl chars where wrong. (Not used on OS/390 UNIX)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ctags:
|
||||
@ -311,13 +311,13 @@ not an exhaustive summary of all the modifications made to the code base.
|
||||
- added special compiler and linker options if building with X11
|
||||
- configure:
|
||||
- after created via autoconf hand-edited it to make the test for
|
||||
ICEConnectionNumber work. This is a autoconf problem. OS/390 UNIX
|
||||
ICEConnectionNumber work. This is a autoconf problem. OS/390 UNIX
|
||||
needs -lX11 for this.
|
||||
- Makefile
|
||||
- Don't include the lib directories ('-L...') into the variable
|
||||
ALL_LIBS. Use own variable ALL_LIB_DIRS instead. A fully POSIX
|
||||
ALL_LIBS. Use own variable ALL_LIB_DIRS instead. A fully POSIX
|
||||
compliant compiler must not accept objects/libraries and options
|
||||
mixed. Now we can call the linker like this:
|
||||
mixed. Now we can call the linker like this:
|
||||
|
||||
$(CC) $(LDFLAGS) $(ALL_LIB_DIRS) $(OBJ) $(ALL_LIBS)
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_beos.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 May 01
|
||||
*os_beos.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -31,11 +31,11 @@ matters not discussed in this file, Vim behaves very much like the Unix
|
||||
1. General *beos-general*
|
||||
|
||||
The default syntax highlighting mostly works with different foreground colors
|
||||
to highlight items. This works best if you set your Terminal window to a
|
||||
darkish background and light letters. Some middle-grey background (for
|
||||
to highlight items. This works best if you set your Terminal window to a
|
||||
darkish background and light letters. Some middle-grey background (for
|
||||
instance (r,g,b)=(168,168,168)) with black letters also works nicely. If you
|
||||
use the default light background and dark letters, it may look better to
|
||||
simply reverse the notion of foreground and background color settings. To do
|
||||
simply reverse the notion of foreground and background color settings. To do
|
||||
this, add this to your .vimrc file (where <Esc> may need to be replaced with
|
||||
the escape character): >
|
||||
|
||||
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ the escape character): >
|
||||
2. Compiling Vim *beos-compiling*
|
||||
|
||||
From the Advanced Access Preview Release (AAPR) on, Vim can be configured with
|
||||
the standard configure script. To get the compiler and its flags right, use
|
||||
the standard configure script. To get the compiler and its flags right, use
|
||||
the following command-line in the shell (you can cut and paste it in one go):
|
||||
|
||||
CC=$BE_C_COMPILER CFLAGS="$BE_DEFAULT_C_FLAGS -O7" \
|
||||
@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ When configure has run, and you wish to enable GUI support, you must edit the
|
||||
config.mk file so that the lines with GUI_xxx refer to $(BEOSGUI_xxx) instead
|
||||
of $(NONE_xxx).
|
||||
Alternatively you can make this change in the Makefile; it will have a
|
||||
more permanent effect. Search for "NONE_".
|
||||
more permanent effect. Search for "NONE_".
|
||||
|
||||
After compilation you need to add the resources to the binary. Add the
|
||||
After compilation you need to add the resources to the binary. Add the
|
||||
following few lines near the end (before the line with "exit $exit_value") of
|
||||
the link.sh script to do this automatically.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -81,12 +81,12 @@ You will need it when using "make install" to install Vim.
|
||||
Now type "make" to compile Vim, then "make install" to install it.
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to install Vim by hand, you must copy Vim to $HOME/config/bin, and
|
||||
create a bunch of symlinks to it ({g,r,rg}{vim,ex,view}). Furthermore you must
|
||||
copy Vims configuration files to $HOME/config/share/vim:
|
||||
create a bunch of symlinks to it ({g,r,rg}{vim,ex,view}). Furthermore you must
|
||||
copy Vim's configuration files to $HOME/config/share/vim:
|
||||
vim-5.0s/{*.vim,doc,syntax}. For completeness, you should also copy the nroff
|
||||
manual pages to $HOME/config/man/man1. Don't forget ctags/ctags and xxd/xxd!
|
||||
manual pages to $HOME/config/man/man1. Don't forget ctags/ctags and xxd/xxd!
|
||||
|
||||
Obviously, you need the unlimited linker to actually link Vim. See
|
||||
Obviously, you need the unlimited linker to actually link Vim. See
|
||||
http://www.metrowerks.com for purchasing the CodeWarrior compiler for BeOS.
|
||||
There are currently no other linkers that can do the job.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ you have the appropriate files installed. |beos-perl|
|
||||
3. Timeout in the Terminal *beos-timeout*
|
||||
|
||||
Because some POSIX/UNIX features are still missing[1], there is no direct OS
|
||||
support for read-with-timeout in the Terminal. This would meat that you cannot
|
||||
support for read-with-timeout in the Terminal. This would mean that you cannot
|
||||
use :mappings of more than one character, unless you also :set notimeout.
|
||||
|'timeout'|
|
||||
|
||||
@ -112,16 +112,16 @@ indistinctive character sequences.
|
||||
These problems do not exist in the GUI.
|
||||
|
||||
[1]: there is no select() on file descriptors; also the termios VMIN and VTIME
|
||||
settings do not seem to work properly. This has been the case since DR7 at
|
||||
settings do not seem to work properly. This has been the case since DR7 at
|
||||
least and still has not been fixed as of PR2.
|
||||
|
||||
*beos-unicode*
|
||||
4. Unicode vs. Latin1 *beos-utf8*
|
||||
|
||||
BeOS uses Unicode and UTF-8 for text strings (16-bit characters encoded to
|
||||
8-bit characters). Vim assumes ISO-Latin1 or other 8-bit character codes.
|
||||
This does not produce the desired results for non-ASCII characters. Try the
|
||||
command :digraphs to see. If they look messed up, use :set isprint=@ to
|
||||
8-bit characters). Vim assumes ISO-Latin1 or other 8-bit character codes.
|
||||
This does not produce the desired results for non-ASCII characters. Try the
|
||||
command :digraphs to see. If they look messed up, use :set isprint=@ to
|
||||
(slightly) improve the display of ISO-Latin1 characters 128-255. This works
|
||||
better in the GUI, depending on which font you use (below).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -133,32 +133,32 @@ You may also use the /boot/bin/xtou command to convert UTF-8 files from (xtou
|
||||
|
||||
Normally Vim starts with the GUI if you start it as gvim or vim -g. The BeOS
|
||||
version tries to determine if it was started from the Tracker instead of the
|
||||
Terminal, and if so, use the GUI anyway. However, the current detection scheme
|
||||
is fooled if you use the command "vim - </dev/null" or "vim filename &". The
|
||||
Terminal, and if so, use the GUI anyway. However, the current detection scheme
|
||||
is fooled if you use the command "vim - </dev/null" or "vim filename &". The
|
||||
latter can be called a feature but probably only works because there is no
|
||||
BSD-style job control.
|
||||
|
||||
Stuff that does not work yet:
|
||||
|
||||
- Running external commands from the GUI does not work 100% (again due to lack
|
||||
of support for select()). There was a choice between seeing the command's
|
||||
output, or being able to interrupt it. I chose for seeing the output. Even
|
||||
of support for select()). There was a choice between seeing the command's
|
||||
output, or being able to interrupt it. I chose for seeing the output. Even
|
||||
now the command sometimes crashes mysteriously, apparently in Be's
|
||||
malloc_internal() called from the putenv() function, after fork()ing. (data
|
||||
access exception occurred, ec01b0ec: 90e80000 *stw r7, 0x0000 (r8))(:!ls
|
||||
works usually, :r !ls usually doesn't). This has been reported as bug
|
||||
malloc_internal() called from the putenv() function, after fork()ing. (data
|
||||
access exception occurred, ec01b0ec: 90e80000 *stw r7, 0x0000 (r8)). (:!ls
|
||||
works usually, :r !ls usually doesn't). This has been reported as bug
|
||||
# 971215-083826.
|
||||
- The window title.
|
||||
- Starting the GUI from the Terminal version with :gui always acts as if
|
||||
:gui -f were used. There is no way to fix this that I can see.
|
||||
:gui -f were used. There is no way to fix this that I can see.
|
||||
- There are some small display glitches here and there that I hope to clean up
|
||||
later. Most of them occur when the window is partially obscured. Some of
|
||||
later. Most of them occur when the window is partially obscured. Some of
|
||||
them seem to be bugs in BeOS, because the Terminal has similar glitches.
|
||||
- Mouse up events are not generated when outside the window. This is a bug in
|
||||
BeOS. You can notice this when selecting text and moving the cursor outside
|
||||
- Mouse up events are not generated when outside the window. This is a bug in
|
||||
BeOS. You can notice this when selecting text and moving the cursor outside
|
||||
the window, then letting go of the mouse button. Another way is when you
|
||||
drag the scrollbar and do the same thing. Because Vim still thinks you are
|
||||
still playing with the scrollbar it won't change it itself. I provided a
|
||||
still playing with the scrollbar it won't change it itself. I provided a
|
||||
workaround which kicks in when the window is activated or deactivated (so it
|
||||
works best with focus- follows-mouse (/boot/bin/ffm) turned on).
|
||||
- The cursor does not flash (very low priority; I'm not sure I even like it
|
||||
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ The default value for $VIM is set at compile time and can be determined with >
|
||||
|
||||
:version
|
||||
|
||||
The normal value is /boot/home/config/share/vim. If you don't like it you can
|
||||
The normal value is /boot/home/config/share/vim. If you don't like it you can
|
||||
set the VIM environment variable to override this, or set 'helpfile' in your
|
||||
.vimrc: >
|
||||
|
||||
@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ session, unless you use the File Types application to set Vim to be "Single
|
||||
Launch") or on the Vim window (starts editing the files). Dropping a folder
|
||||
sets Vim's current working directory. |:cd| |:pwd| If you drop files or
|
||||
folders with either SHIFT key pressed, Vim changes directory to the folder
|
||||
that contains the first item dropped. When starting Vim, there is no need to
|
||||
that contains the first item dropped. When starting Vim, there is no need to
|
||||
press shift: Vim behaves as if you do.
|
||||
|
||||
Files dropped set the current argument list. |argument-list|
|
||||
@ -198,10 +198,10 @@ Files dropped set the current argument list. |argument-list|
|
||||
8. Single Launch vs. Multiple Launch *beos-launch*
|
||||
|
||||
As distributed Vim's Application Flags (as seen in the FileTypes preference)
|
||||
are set to Multiple Launch. If you prefer, you can set them to Single Launch
|
||||
are set to Multiple Launch. If you prefer, you can set them to Single Launch
|
||||
instead. Attempts to start a second copy of Vim will cause the first Vim to
|
||||
open the files instead. This works from the Tracker but also from the command
|
||||
line. In the latter case, non-file (option) arguments are not supported.
|
||||
open the files instead. This works from the Tracker but also from the command
|
||||
line. In the latter case, non-file (option) arguments are not supported.
|
||||
|
||||
NB: Only the GUI version has a BApplication (and hence Application Flags).
|
||||
This section does not apply to the GUI-less version, should you compile one.
|
||||
@ -214,16 +214,16 @@ Set fonts with >
|
||||
:set guifont=Courier10_BT/Roman/10
|
||||
|
||||
where the first part is the font family, the second part the style, and the
|
||||
third part the size. You can use underscores instead of spaces in family and
|
||||
third part the size. You can use underscores instead of spaces in family and
|
||||
style.
|
||||
|
||||
Best results are obtained with monospaced fonts (such as Courier). Vim
|
||||
Best results are obtained with monospaced fonts (such as Courier). Vim
|
||||
attempts to use all fonts in B_FIXED_SPACING mode but apparently this does not
|
||||
work for proportional fonts (despite what the BeBook says).
|
||||
|
||||
Vim also tries to use the B_ISO8859_1 encoding, also known as ISO Latin 1.
|
||||
This also does not work for all fonts. It does work for Courier, but not for
|
||||
ProFontISOLatin1/Regular (strangely enough). You can verify this by giving the >
|
||||
This also does not work for all fonts. It does work for Courier, but not for
|
||||
ProFontISOLatin1/Regular (strangely enough). You can verify this by giving the >
|
||||
|
||||
:digraphs
|
||||
|
||||
@ -270,30 +270,30 @@ because the ALT (aka COMMAND) keys are not passed to applications.
|
||||
|
||||
Vim calls the various mouse buttons LeftMouse, MiddleMouse and RightMouse. If
|
||||
you use the default Mouse preference settings these names indeed correspond to
|
||||
reality. Vim uses this mapping:
|
||||
reality. Vim uses this mapping:
|
||||
|
||||
Button 1 -> LeftMouse,
|
||||
Button 2 -> RightMouse,
|
||||
Button 3 -> MiddleMouse.
|
||||
|
||||
If your mouse has fewer than 3 buttons you can provide your own mapping from
|
||||
mouse clicks with modifier(s) to other mouse buttons. See the file
|
||||
mouse clicks with modifier(s) to other mouse buttons. See the file
|
||||
vim-5.x/macros/swapmous.vim for an example. |gui-mouse-mapping|
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
12. Color names *beos-colors*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim has a number of color names built-in. Additional names are read from the
|
||||
file $VIMRUNTIME/rgb.txt, if present. This file is basically the color
|
||||
database from X. Names used from this file are cached for efficiency.
|
||||
Vim has a number of color names built-in. Additional names are read from the
|
||||
file $VIMRUNTIME/rgb.txt, if present. This file is basically the color
|
||||
database from X. Names used from this file are cached for efficiency.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
13. Compiling with Perl *beos-perl*
|
||||
|
||||
Compiling with Perl support enabled is slightly tricky. The Metrowerks
|
||||
compiler has some strange ideas where to search for include files. Since
|
||||
Compiling with Perl support enabled is slightly tricky. The Metrowerks
|
||||
compiler has some strange ideas where to search for include files. Since
|
||||
several include files with Perl have the same names as some Vim header
|
||||
files, the wrong ones get included. To fix this, run the following Perl
|
||||
files, the wrong ones get included. To fix this, run the following Perl
|
||||
script while in the vim-5.0/src directory: >
|
||||
|
||||
preproc.pl > perl.h
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_mac.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 13
|
||||
*os_mac.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar et al.
|
||||
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Indianapolis IN 46220 USA
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
1. Filename Convention *mac-filename*
|
||||
|
||||
You can use either the unix or mac path separator or a mix of both. In order
|
||||
You can use either the unix or mac path separator or a mix of both. In order
|
||||
to determine if the specified filename is relative to the current folder or
|
||||
absolute (i.e. relative to the "Desktop"), the following algorithm is used:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ You can use the |$VIM| and |$VIMRUNTIME| variable. >
|
||||
2. .vimrc and .vim files *mac-vimfile*
|
||||
|
||||
On the Mac files starting with a dot "." are discouraged, thus the rc files
|
||||
are named "vimrc" or "_vimrc" and "gvimrc" or "_gvimrc". These files can be in
|
||||
are named "vimrc" or "_vimrc" and "gvimrc" or "_gvimrc". These files can be in
|
||||
any format (mac, dos or unix). Vim can handle any file format when the
|
||||
|'nocompatible'| option is set, otherwise it will only handle mac format
|
||||
files.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_mint.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2001 Sep 03
|
||||
*os_mint.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Jens M. Felderhoff
|
||||
@ -15,12 +15,12 @@ The Unix behavior described in the documentation also refers to the
|
||||
MiNT version of Vim unless explicitly stated otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
For wildcard expansion of <~> (home directory) you need a shell that
|
||||
expands the tilde. The vanilla Bourne shell doesn't recognize it.
|
||||
expands the tilde. The vanilla Bourne shell doesn't recognize it.
|
||||
With csh and ksh it should work OK.
|
||||
|
||||
The MiNT version of vim needs the termcap file /etc/termcap with the
|
||||
terminal capabilities of your terminal. Builtin termcaps are
|
||||
supported for the vt52 terminal. Termcap entries for the TOSWIN window
|
||||
terminal capabilities of your terminal. Builtin termcaps are
|
||||
supported for the vt52 terminal. Termcap entries for the TOSWIN window
|
||||
manager and the virtual console terminals have been appended to the
|
||||
termcap file that comes with the Vim distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_msdos.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Aug 31
|
||||
*os_msdos.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ write a file, and for filter commands. Or Vim runs out of memory, and random
|
||||
problems may result.
|
||||
|
||||
The Dos32 version cannot have an unlimited number of files open at any one
|
||||
time. The limit depends on the setting of FILES in your CONFIG.SYS. This
|
||||
time. The limit depends on the setting of FILES in your CONFIG.SYS. This
|
||||
defaults to 15; if you need to edit a lot of files, you should increase this.
|
||||
If you do not set FILES high enough, you can get strange errors, and shell
|
||||
commands may cause a crash!
|
||||
@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ In other versions, the following can be used.
|
||||
|
||||
How to copy/paste text from/to vim in a dos box:
|
||||
|
||||
1) to get VIM to run in a window, instead of full screen, press alt+enter.
|
||||
1) To get VIM to run in a window, instead of full screen, press alt+enter.
|
||||
This toggles back and forth between full screen and a dos window.
|
||||
NOTE: In Windows 95 you must have the property "Fast Pasting" unchecked!
|
||||
In the properties dialog box for the MS-DOS window, go to "MS-DOS
|
||||
@ -251,25 +251,25 @@ How to copy/paste text from/to vim in a dos box:
|
||||
|
||||
2) To paste something _into_ Vim, put Vim in insert mode.
|
||||
|
||||
3) put the text you want to paste on the windows clipboard.
|
||||
3) Put the text you want to paste on the windows clipboard.
|
||||
|
||||
4) Click the control box in the upper left of the Vim window. (This looks
|
||||
like a big minus sign). If you don't want to use the mouse, you can get
|
||||
4) Click the control box in the upper left of the Vim window. (This looks
|
||||
like a big minus sign.) If you don't want to use the mouse, you can get
|
||||
this with alt+spacebar.
|
||||
5) on the resulting dropdown menu choose "Edit"
|
||||
6) on the child dropdown menu choose "Paste"
|
||||
5) On the resulting dropdown menu choose "Edit".
|
||||
6) On the child dropdown menu choose "Paste".
|
||||
|
||||
To copy something from the Vim window to the clipboard,
|
||||
|
||||
1) select the control box to get the control drop down menu.
|
||||
2) select "Edit".
|
||||
3) select "Mark"
|
||||
4) using either the keys or the mouse, select the part of the Vim window that
|
||||
you want to copy. To use the keys, use the arrow keys, and hold down shift
|
||||
1) Select the control box to get the control drop down menu.
|
||||
2) Select "Edit".
|
||||
3) Select "Mark".
|
||||
4) Using either the keys or the mouse, select the part of the Vim window that
|
||||
you want to copy. To use the keys, use the arrow keys, and hold down shift
|
||||
to extend the selection.
|
||||
5) when you've completed your selection, press 'enter.' The selection
|
||||
is now in the windows clipboard. By the way, this can be any
|
||||
rectangular selection, for example columns 4-25 in rows 7-10. It can
|
||||
5) When you've completed your selection, press 'enter'. The selection
|
||||
is now in the windows clipboard. By the way, this can be any
|
||||
rectangular selection, for example columns 4-25 in rows 7-10. It can
|
||||
include anything in the VIM window: the output of a :!dir, for
|
||||
example.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_os2.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jan 09
|
||||
*os_os2.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Paul Slootman
|
||||
@ -28,19 +28,19 @@ that are started via a shell escape from within Vim. This specifically means
|
||||
that Vim won't be able to remove the swap file(s) associated with buffers open
|
||||
at the time the other program was started, until the other program is stopped.
|
||||
At that time, the swap file may be removed, but if Vim could not do that the
|
||||
first time, it won't be removed at all. You'll get warnings that some other
|
||||
first time, it won't be removed at all. You'll get warnings that some other
|
||||
Vim session may be editing the file when you start Vim up again on that file.
|
||||
This can be reproduced with ":!start epm". Now quit Vim, and start Vim again
|
||||
This can be reproduced with ":!start epm". Now quit Vim, and start Vim again
|
||||
with the file that was in the buffer at the time epm was started. I'm working
|
||||
on this!
|
||||
|
||||
A second problem is that Vim doesn't understand the situation when using it
|
||||
when accessing the OS/2 system via the network, e.g. using telnet from a Unix
|
||||
system, and then starting Vim. The problem seems to be that OS/2 =sometimes=
|
||||
system, and then starting Vim. The problem seems to be that OS/2 =sometimes=
|
||||
recognizes function / cursor keys, and tries to convert those to the
|
||||
corresponding OS/2 codes generated by the "normal" PC keyboard. I've been
|
||||
corresponding OS/2 codes generated by the "normal" PC keyboard. I've been
|
||||
testing a workaround (mapping the OS/2 codes to the correct functions), but so
|
||||
far I can't say anything conclusive (this is on Warp 3, by the way). In the
|
||||
far I can't say anything conclusive (this is on Warp 3, by the way). In the
|
||||
meantime any help will be appreciated.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ is generally available as (ask Archie about it):
|
||||
emxrt.zip emx runtime package
|
||||
|
||||
I've included a copy of emx.dll, which should be copied to one of the
|
||||
directories listed in your LIBPATH. Emx is GPL'ed, but the emx.dll library is
|
||||
directories listed in your LIBPATH. Emx is GPL'ed, but the emx.dll library is
|
||||
not (read COPYING.EMX to find out what that means to you).
|
||||
|
||||
This emx.dll is from the emxfix04.zip package, which unfortunately has a bug,
|
||||
eh, I mean a POSIX feature, in select(). Versions of Vim before 3.27 will
|
||||
appear to hang when starting (actually, while processing vimrc). Hit <Enter> a
|
||||
appear to hang when starting (actually, while processing vimrc). Hit <Enter> a
|
||||
couple of times until Vim starts working if this happens. Next, get an up to
|
||||
date version of Vim!
|
||||
|
||||
@ -84,14 +84,14 @@ you get a tree of Vim files like this:
|
||||
etc.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: .vimrc may also be called _vimrc to accommodate those who have chosen to
|
||||
install OS/2 on a FAT file system. Vim first tries to find .vimrc and if that
|
||||
install OS/2 on a FAT file system. Vim first tries to find .vimrc and if that
|
||||
fails, looks for _vimrc in the same place. The existence of a .vimrc or
|
||||
_vimrc file influences the 'compatible' options, which can have unexpected side
|
||||
effects. See |'compatible'|.
|
||||
|
||||
If you're using network drives with OS/2, then you can install Vim on a
|
||||
network drive (including .vimrc; this is then called the "system" vimrc file),
|
||||
and then use a personal copy of .vimrc (the "user" vimrc file). This should be
|
||||
and then use a personal copy of .vimrc (the "user" vimrc file). This should be
|
||||
located in a directory indicated by the HOME environment variable.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -135,14 +135,14 @@ TERMINAL SETTING
|
||||
|
||||
*os2ansi*
|
||||
Use "os2ansi" as the TERM environment variable (or don't set it at all, as the
|
||||
default is the correct value). You can set term to os2ansi in the .vimrc, in
|
||||
default is the correct value). You can set term to os2ansi in the .vimrc, in
|
||||
case you need TERM to be a different value for other applications. The
|
||||
problem is that OS/2 ANSI emulation is quite limited (it doesn't have insert /
|
||||
delete line, for example).
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to use a different value for TERM (because of other programs, for
|
||||
example), make sure that the termcap entry for that TERM value has the
|
||||
appropriate key mappings. The termcap.dat distributed with emx does not always
|
||||
appropriate key mappings. The termcap.dat distributed with emx does not always
|
||||
have them. Here are some suitable values to add to the termcap entry of your
|
||||
choice; these allow the cursor keys and the named function keys (such as
|
||||
pagedown) to work.
|
||||
@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ clipboard you would use: >
|
||||
endif
|
||||
|
||||
This will ensure that only on OS/2 clipbrd is called whereas on other
|
||||
platforms vims build in mechanism is used. (To enable this functions on every
|
||||
platforms vims build in mechanism is used. (To enable this functions on every
|
||||
load of Vim place the above lines in your .vimrc.)
|
||||
|
||||
vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_qnx.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Apr 23
|
||||
*os_qnx.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Julian Kinraid
|
||||
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Vim on QNX behaves much like other unix versions. |os_unix.txt|
|
||||
|
||||
2. Compiling Vim *qnx-compiling*
|
||||
|
||||
Vim can be compiled using the standard configure/make approach. If you want to
|
||||
Vim can be compiled using the standard configure/make approach. If you want to
|
||||
compile for X11, pass the --with-x option to configure. Otherwise, running
|
||||
./configure without any arguments or passing --enable-gui=photon, will compile
|
||||
vim with the Photon gui support. Run ./configure --help , to find out other
|
||||
@ -118,12 +118,12 @@ Known problems:
|
||||
set noguipty
|
||||
|
||||
Bugs:
|
||||
- Still a slight problem with menu highlighting
|
||||
- Still a slight problem with menu highlighting.
|
||||
- When using phditto/phinows/etc., if you are using a font that
|
||||
doesn't support the bold attribute, when vim attempts to draw
|
||||
bold text it will be all messed up.
|
||||
- The cursor can sometimes be hard to see.
|
||||
- A number of minor problems that can fixed :)
|
||||
- A number of minor problems that can fixed. :)
|
||||
|
||||
Todo:
|
||||
- Improve multi-language support.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_risc.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 May 01
|
||||
*os_risc.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 29
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Thomas Leonard
|
||||
@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ distribution, but modified slightly to work within the limits of ADFS, plus
|
||||
some extra files such as the window templates.
|
||||
|
||||
User choices are read from `Choices:*' and are saved to `<Choices$Write>.*'.
|
||||
If you have the new !Boot structure then these should be set up already. If
|
||||
If you have the new !Boot structure then these should be set up already. If
|
||||
not, set Choices$Path to a list of directories to search when looking for
|
||||
user configuration files. Set Choices$Write to the directory you want files
|
||||
user configuration files. Set Choices$Write to the directory you want files
|
||||
to be saved into (so your search patterns and marks can be remembered between
|
||||
sessions).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ sessions).
|
||||
2. Filename munging
|
||||
|
||||
All pathname munging is disabled by default, so Vim should behave like a
|
||||
normal RISC OS application now. So, if you want to edit `doc/html' then you
|
||||
normal RISC OS application now. So, if you want to edit `doc/html' then you
|
||||
actually type `*vi doc/html'.
|
||||
|
||||
The only times munging is done is when:
|
||||
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ The only times munging is done is when:
|
||||
- Searching included files from C programs, since these are always munged.
|
||||
See |[I|.
|
||||
Note: make sure you are in the right directory when you use this
|
||||
command (ie the one with subdirectories 'c' and 'h').
|
||||
command (i.e. the one with subdirectories 'c' and 'h').
|
||||
|
||||
- Sourcing files using |:so|.
|
||||
Paths starting `$VIM/' are munged like this:
|
||||
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ To use Vim from the command-line use the `*vi' command (or '*ex' for
|
||||
Type `*vi -h' for a list of options.
|
||||
|
||||
Running the command-line version of Vim in a large high-color mode may cause
|
||||
the scrolling to be very slow. Either change to a mode with fewer colors or
|
||||
the scrolling to be very slow. Either change to a mode with fewer colors or
|
||||
use the GUI version.
|
||||
|
||||
Also, holding down Ctrl will slow it down even more, and Ctrl-Shift will
|
||||
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ The global clipboard is supported, so you can select some text and then
|
||||
paste it directly into another application (provided it supports the
|
||||
clipboard too).
|
||||
|
||||
Clicking Menu now opens a menu like a normal RISC OS program. Hold down Shift
|
||||
Clicking Menu now opens a menu like a normal RISC OS program. Hold down Shift
|
||||
when clicking Menu to paste (from the global clipboard).
|
||||
|
||||
Dragging a file to the window replaces the CURRENT buffer (the one with the
|
||||
@ -134,27 +134,27 @@ For fonts, you have the choice of the system font, an outline font, the system
|
||||
font via ZapRedraw and any of the Zap fonts via ZapRedraw: >
|
||||
|
||||
:set guifont=
|
||||
< To use the system font via the VDU drivers. Supports
|
||||
< To use the system font via the VDU drivers. Supports
|
||||
bold and underline.
|
||||
>
|
||||
:set guifont=Corpus.Medium
|
||||
< Use the named outline font. You can use any font, but
|
||||
< Use the named outline font. You can use any font, but
|
||||
only monospaced ones like Corpus look right.
|
||||
>
|
||||
:set guifont=Corpus.Medium:w8:h12:b:i
|
||||
< As before, but with size of 8 point by 12 point, and
|
||||
in bold italic.
|
||||
If only one of width and height is given then that
|
||||
value is used for both. If neither is given then 10
|
||||
value is used for both. If neither is given then 10
|
||||
point is used.
|
||||
|
||||
Thanks to John Kortink, Vim can use the ZapRedraw module. Start the font name
|
||||
Thanks to John Kortink, Vim can use the ZapRedraw module. Start the font name
|
||||
with '!' (or '!!' for double height), like this: >
|
||||
|
||||
:set guifont=!!
|
||||
< Use the system font, but via ZapRedraw. This gives a
|
||||
faster redraw on StrongARM processors, but you can't
|
||||
get bold or italic text. Double height.
|
||||
get bold or italic text. Double height.
|
||||
>
|
||||
:set guifont=!script
|
||||
< Uses the named Zap font (a directory in VimFont$Path).
|
||||
@ -164,12 +164,12 @@ with '!' (or '!!' for double height), like this: >
|
||||
currently, but you can use any of the Zap fonts if
|
||||
they are in VimFont$Path.
|
||||
Vim will try to load font files '0', 'B', 'I' and 'IB'
|
||||
from the named directory. Only '0' (normal style) MUST
|
||||
be present. Link files are not currently supported.
|
||||
from the named directory. Only '0' (normal style) MUST
|
||||
be present. Link files are not currently supported.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that when using ZapRedraw the edit bar is drawn in front of the character
|
||||
you are on rather than behind it. Also redraw is incorrect for screen modes
|
||||
with eigen values of 0. If the font includes control characters then you can
|
||||
you are on rather than behind it. Also redraw is incorrect for screen modes
|
||||
with eigen values of 0. If the font includes control characters then you can
|
||||
get Vim to display them by changing the 'isprint' option.
|
||||
|
||||
If you find the scrolling is too slow on your machine, try experimenting
|
||||
@ -199,8 +199,8 @@ It seems to work pretty well now, using '*vi -T ansi'.
|
||||
|
||||
If Vim crashes then the swap and backup files (if any) will be in the
|
||||
directories set with the 'directory' and 'bdir' options. By default the swap
|
||||
files are in <Wimp$ScrapDir> (ie inside !Scrap) and backups are in the
|
||||
directory you were saving to. Vim will allow you to try and recover the file
|
||||
files are in <Wimp$ScrapDir> (i.e. inside !Scrap) and backups are in the
|
||||
directory you were saving to. Vim will allow you to try and recover the file
|
||||
when you next try to edit it.
|
||||
|
||||
To see a list of swap files, press <F12> and type `*vi -r'.
|
||||
@ -223,13 +223,13 @@ command-line version, or press CTRL-C in the GUI version.
|
||||
*riscos-memory*
|
||||
8. Memory usage
|
||||
|
||||
Vim will use dynamic areas on RISC OS 3.5 or later. If you can use them on
|
||||
older machines then edit the !RunTxt and GVim files. I don't know what UnixLib
|
||||
Vim will use dynamic areas on RISC OS 3.5 or later. If you can use them on
|
||||
older machines then edit the !RunTxt and GVim files. I don't know what UnixLib
|
||||
does by default on these machines so I'm playing safe.
|
||||
|
||||
It doesn't work at all well without dynamic areas, since it can't change its
|
||||
memory allocation once running. Hence you should edit `!Vim.GVim' and
|
||||
`!Vim.!RunTxt' to choose the best size for you. You probably need at least
|
||||
memory allocation once running. Hence you should edit `!Vim.GVim' and
|
||||
`!Vim.!RunTxt' to choose the best size for you. You probably need at least
|
||||
about 1400K.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
@ -237,11 +237,11 @@ about 1400K.
|
||||
9. Filetypes
|
||||
|
||||
You can now specify that autocommands are only executed for files of certain
|
||||
types. The filetype is given in the form &xxx, when xxx is the filetype.
|
||||
types. The filetype is given in the form &xxx, when xxx is the filetype.
|
||||
|
||||
Filetypes must be specified by number (eg &fff for Text).
|
||||
Filetypes must be specified by number (e.g. &fff for Text).
|
||||
|
||||
The system has changed from version 5.3. The new sequence of events is:
|
||||
The system has changed from version 5.3. The new sequence of events is:
|
||||
|
||||
- A file is loaded. |'osfiletype'| is set to the RISC OS filetype.
|
||||
- Based on the filetype and pathname, Vim will try to set |'filetype'| to the
|
||||
@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Some examples may make this clearer:
|
||||
since many pathnames contain them.
|
||||
|
||||
- You can prefix the command with '~', which stops any output from being
|
||||
displayed. This also means that you don't have to press <Enter> afterwards,
|
||||
displayed. This also means that you don't have to press <Enter> afterwards,
|
||||
and stops the screen from being redrawn. {only in the GUI version}
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
@ -274,14 +274,14 @@ Some examples may make this clearer:
|
||||
Downloading everything you need:
|
||||
|
||||
- Get the latest source distribution (see www.vim.org)
|
||||
- Get the runtime environment files (eg these help files)
|
||||
- Get the runtime environment files (e.g. these help files)
|
||||
- Get the `extra' archive (contains the RISC OS specific bits)
|
||||
- Get the RISC OS binary distribution (if possible)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unarchiving:
|
||||
|
||||
- Create a raFS disk and put the archives on it.
|
||||
- Create a raFS disk and put the archives on it
|
||||
- Un-gzip them
|
||||
- Un-tar them (*tar xELf 50 archive/tar)
|
||||
|
||||
@ -289,9 +289,9 @@ Unarchiving:
|
||||
Recompiling the sources:
|
||||
|
||||
- Create c, s, and h directories.
|
||||
- Put all the header files in 'h' \
|
||||
- Put all the C files in `c' | And lose the extensions
|
||||
- Put the assembler file (`swis/s') in 's' /
|
||||
- Put all the header files in 'h'. \
|
||||
- Put all the C files in `c'. | And lose the extensions
|
||||
- Put the assembler file (`swis/s') in 's'. /
|
||||
- Rename all the files in `proto' to `h', like this:
|
||||
raFS::VimSrc.source.proto.file/pro
|
||||
becomes
|
||||
@ -300,9 +300,9 @@ Recompiling the sources:
|
||||
.pro"
|
||||
with
|
||||
_pro.h"
|
||||
- Create a simple Makefile if desired and do '*make -k'
|
||||
Use 'CC = gcc -DRISCOS -DUSE_GUI -O2 -x c' in the Makefile
|
||||
- Save the binary as !Vim.Vim in the binary distribution
|
||||
- Create a simple Makefile if desired and do '*make -k'.
|
||||
Use 'CC = gcc -DRISCOS -DUSE_GUI -O2 -x c' in the Makefile.
|
||||
- Save the binary as !Vim.Vim in the binary distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Updating the run-time environment:
|
||||
@ -311,9 +311,9 @@ Updating the run-time environment:
|
||||
new files.
|
||||
- Remove files in `doc' not ending in `/txt', except for `tags'.
|
||||
- Lose the extensions from the files in `doc'.
|
||||
- Edit the `doc.tags' file. Remove extensions from the second column: >
|
||||
- Edit the `doc.tags' file. Remove extensions from the second column: >
|
||||
:%s/^\(.[^\t]*\t.*\)\.txt\t/\1\t/
|
||||
- Remove extensions from the syntax files. Split them into two directories
|
||||
- Remove extensions from the syntax files. Split them into two directories
|
||||
to avoid the 77 entry limit on old ADFS filesystems.
|
||||
- Edit `Vim:FileType' to match `*.c.*' as well as `*/c' and so on.
|
||||
Add filetype checking too.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*os_vms.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jun 16
|
||||
*os_vms.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
|
||||
@ -69,32 +69,32 @@ See the file [.SRC]INSTALLVMS.TXT.
|
||||
4. Problems *vms-problems*
|
||||
|
||||
The code has been tested under Open VMS 6.2 - 7.3 on Alpha and VAX platforms
|
||||
with the DECC compiler. It should work without bigger problems.
|
||||
If it happened that your system does not have some include libraries you can
|
||||
tune up in OS_VMS_CONF.H file.
|
||||
with the DEC C compiler. It should work without bigger problems.
|
||||
If your system does not have some include libraries you can tune up in
|
||||
OS_VMS_CONF.H file.
|
||||
|
||||
If you decided to build Vim with +perl, +python, etc. options, first you need
|
||||
to download OpenVMS distributions of Perl and Python. Build and deploy the
|
||||
libraries and change adequate lines in MAKE_VMS.MMS file. There should not be
|
||||
problem from Vim side.
|
||||
to download OpenVMS distributions of Perl and Python. Build and deploy the
|
||||
libraries and change adequate lines in MAKE_VMS.MMS file. There should not be
|
||||
a problem from Vim side.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Under VAX it should work with DEC C compiler without problem. VAXC
|
||||
compiler is not fully ANSI C compatible in pre-processor directives
|
||||
semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program what will do the
|
||||
lion part of the job. For detailed instruction read file INSTALLvms.txt
|
||||
Note: Under VAX it should work with the DEC C compiler without problems. The
|
||||
VAX C compiler is not fully ANSI C compatible in pre-processor directives
|
||||
semantics, therefore you have to use a converter program what will do the lion
|
||||
part of the job. For detailed instructions read file INSTALLvms.txt
|
||||
|
||||
MMS_VIM.EXE is building together with VIM.EXE, but for XD.EXE you should
|
||||
MMS_VIM.EXE is build together with VIM.EXE, but for XD.EXE you should
|
||||
change to subdirectory and build it separately.
|
||||
|
||||
CTAGS is not part of Vim source distribution any more, however the OpenVMS
|
||||
specific source might contain CTAGS source files as it is described above.
|
||||
CTAGS is not part of the Vim source distribution anymore, however the OpenVMS
|
||||
specific source might contain CTAGS source files as described above.
|
||||
You can find more information about CTAGS on VMS at
|
||||
http://www.polarhome.com/ctags/
|
||||
|
||||
Advanced users may try some acrobatics in FEATURE.H file also.
|
||||
|
||||
It is possible to compile with +xfontset +xim options too, but then you have
|
||||
to set up GUI fonts etc. correctly. See. :help xim from Vim command prompt.
|
||||
to set up GUI fonts etc. correctly. See :help xim from Vim command prompt.
|
||||
|
||||
You may want to use GUI with GTK icons, then you have to download and install
|
||||
GTK for OpenVMS or at least runtime shareable images - LIBGTK from
|
||||
@ -132,18 +132,18 @@ Use: >
|
||||
define/nolog TMP device:[path.tmp]
|
||||
|
||||
to get vim.exe to find its document, filetype, and syntax files, and to
|
||||
specify a directory where temporary files will be located. Copy the "runtime"
|
||||
specify a directory where temporary files will be located. Copy the "runtime"
|
||||
subdirectory of the vim distribution to vimruntime.
|
||||
|
||||
Logicals $VIMRUNTIME and $TMP are optional.
|
||||
|
||||
If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, Vim will guess and try to set up automatically.
|
||||
Read more about at :help runtime
|
||||
Read more about it at :help runtime
|
||||
|
||||
If $TMP is not set, you will not be able to use some functions as CTAGS,
|
||||
XXD, printing etc. that use temporary directory for normal operation.
|
||||
$TMP directory should be readable and writable by the user(s).
|
||||
The easiest way to set up $TMP is to define logical: >
|
||||
The $TMP directory should be readable and writable by the user(s).
|
||||
The easiest way to set up $TMP is to define a logical: >
|
||||
|
||||
define/nolog TMP SYS$SCRATCH
|
||||
or as: >
|
||||
@ -155,9 +155,9 @@ or as: >
|
||||
|
||||
Usually, you want to run just one version of Vim on your system, therefore
|
||||
it is enough to dedicate one directory for Vim.
|
||||
Copy all Vim runtime directory structure to the deployment position.
|
||||
Copy the whole Vim runtime directory structure to the deployment position.
|
||||
Add the following lines to your LOGIN.COM (in SYS$LOGIN directory).
|
||||
Set up logical $VIM as: >
|
||||
Set up the logical $VIM as: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ define VIM device:<path>
|
||||
|
||||
@ -174,20 +174,20 @@ Please, check the notes for customization and configuration of symbols.
|
||||
You may want to create .vimrc and .gvimrc files in your home directory
|
||||
(SYS$LOGIN) to overwrite default settings.
|
||||
|
||||
The easiest way is just rename example files. You may leave the menu file
|
||||
(MENU.VIM) and files vimrc and gvimrc in the original $VIM directory. It will
|
||||
be default setup for all users, and for users is enough just to have their
|
||||
own additions or resetting in home directory in files .vimrc and .gvimrc.
|
||||
The easiest way is just rename example files. You may leave the menu file
|
||||
(MENU.VIM) and files vimrc and gvimrc in the original $VIM directory. It will
|
||||
be default setup for all users, and for users it is enough just to have their
|
||||
own additions or resetting in their home directory in files .vimrc and .gvimrc.
|
||||
It should work without problems.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Remember, system rc files (default for all users) does not have leading
|
||||
"." So, system rc files are: >
|
||||
Note: Remember, system rc files (default for all users) don't have a leading
|
||||
".". So, system rc files are: >
|
||||
|
||||
$VIM:vimrc
|
||||
$VIM:gvimrc
|
||||
$VIM:menu.vim
|
||||
|
||||
and user's customized rc files are: >
|
||||
and user customized rc files are: >
|
||||
|
||||
sys$login:.vimrc
|
||||
sys$login:.gvimrc
|
||||
@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Example LOGIN.COM: >
|
||||
|
||||
Note: This set-up should be enough, if you are working on standalone server or
|
||||
clustered environment, but if you want to use Vim as internode editor in
|
||||
DECNET environment, it will satisfy you as well.
|
||||
DECNET environment, it will satisfy as well.
|
||||
You just have to define the "whole" path: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ define VIM "<server_name>[""user password""]::device:<path>"
|
||||
@ -214,10 +214,11 @@ as for example: >
|
||||
$ define VIM "PLUTO::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]"
|
||||
$ define VIM "PLUTO""ZAY mypass""::RF10:[UTIL.VIM]" ! if passwd required
|
||||
|
||||
You can also use $VIMRUNTIME logical to point to proper version of Vim if you
|
||||
have installed more versions in the same time. If $VIMRUNTIME is not defined
|
||||
Vim will borrow value from $VIM logical. You can find more information about
|
||||
$VIMRUNTIME logical by typing :help runtime as a Vim command.
|
||||
You can also use the $VIMRUNTIME logical to point to the proper version of Vim
|
||||
if you have installed more versions at the same time. If $VIMRUNTIME is not
|
||||
defined Vim will borrow its value from the $VIM logical. You can find more
|
||||
information about the $VIMRUNTIME logical by typing :help runtime as a Vim
|
||||
command.
|
||||
|
||||
System administrators might want to set up a system wide Vim installation,
|
||||
then add to the SYS$STARTUP:SYLOGICALS.COM >
|
||||
@ -231,38 +232,40 @@ and to the SYS$STARTUP:SYLOGIN.COM >
|
||||
$ gv*im:== spawn/nowait/input=NLA0 mcr VIM:VIM.EXE -g -GEOMETRY 80x40
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
It will set up normal Vim work environment for every user on the system.
|
||||
It will set up a normal Vim work environment for every user on the system.
|
||||
|
||||
==============================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
7. GUI mode questions *vms-gui*
|
||||
|
||||
OpenVMS in a real mainframe OS, therefore even if it has a GUI console, most of
|
||||
the users does not use a native X/Window environment during normal operation.
|
||||
It is not possible to start Vim in GUI mode "just like that". But anyhow it is
|
||||
not too complicate either.
|
||||
OpenVMS is a real mainframe OS, therefore even if it has a GUI console, most
|
||||
of the users do not use a native X/Window environment during normal operation.
|
||||
It is not possible to start Vim in GUI mode "just like that". But anyhow it
|
||||
is not too complicated either.
|
||||
|
||||
First of all: you will need an executable that is built with enabled GUI.
|
||||
First of all: you will need an executable that is built with the GUI enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
Second: you need to have installed DECW/Motif on your VMS server, otherwise
|
||||
you will get errors that some shareable libraries are missing.
|
||||
|
||||
Third: If you choose to run Vim with extra feature as GUI/GTK then you need
|
||||
GTK installation too or at least GTK runtime environment (LIBGTK etc.)
|
||||
Third: If you choose to run Vim with extra features such as GUI/GTK then you
|
||||
need a GTK installation too or at least a GTK runtime environment (LIBGTK
|
||||
etc.).
|
||||
|
||||
1) If you are working on the VMS X/Motif console:
|
||||
Start Vim with the command: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ mc device:<path>VIM.EXE -g
|
||||
<
|
||||
or type :gui as a command to the Vim command prompt. For more info :help gui
|
||||
or type :gui as a command to the Vim command prompt. For more info :help
|
||||
gui
|
||||
|
||||
2) If you are working on other X/Window environment as Unix or some remote X
|
||||
VMS console. Set up display to your host with: >
|
||||
2) If you are working on some other X/Window environment like Unix or a remote
|
||||
X VMS console. Set up display to your host with: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ set disp/create/node=<your IP address>/trans=<transport-name>
|
||||
<
|
||||
and start Vim as in point 1. You can find more help in VMS documentation or
|
||||
and start Vim as in point 1. You can find more help in VMS documentation or
|
||||
type: help set disp in VMS prompt.
|
||||
Examples: >
|
||||
|
||||
@ -276,11 +279,11 @@ For more information type $help set disp in VMS prompt.
|
||||
3) Another elegant solution is XDM if you have installed on OpenVMS box.
|
||||
It is possible to work from XDM client as from GUI console.
|
||||
|
||||
4) If you are working on MS Windows or other non X/Window environment
|
||||
You need to set up one X server and run Vim as in point 2.
|
||||
For MS Windows there are available free X servers as MIX , Omni X etc.
|
||||
4) If you are working on MS-Windows or some other non X/Window environment
|
||||
you need to set up one X server and run Vim as in point 2.
|
||||
For MS-Windows there are available free X servers as MIX , Omni X etc.,
|
||||
as well as excellent commercial products as eXcursion or ReflectionX with
|
||||
built in DEC support.
|
||||
built-in DEC support.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note, that executables without GUI are slightly faster during startup
|
||||
then with enabled GUI in character mode. Therefore, if you do not use GUI
|
||||
@ -319,7 +322,7 @@ Read more in ch: 8.6 (Terminal problems).
|
||||
|
||||
8.2 Filters
|
||||
|
||||
Vim supports filters; ie. if you have a sort program that can handle
|
||||
Vim supports filters, i.e., if you have a sort program that can handle
|
||||
input/output redirection like Unix (<infile >outfile), you could use >
|
||||
|
||||
:map \s 0!'aqsort<CR>
|
||||
@ -333,19 +336,20 @@ Vim is saving files into a new file with the next higher file version
|
||||
number, try these settings. >
|
||||
|
||||
:set nobackup " does not create *.*_ backup files
|
||||
:set nowritebackup " does not have any purpose on VMS. It's default.
|
||||
:set nowritebackup " does not have any purpose on VMS. It's the
|
||||
" default.
|
||||
|
||||
Recovery is working perfect as well from the default swap file.
|
||||
Read more with :help swapfile
|
||||
|
||||
(Claude Marinier <ClaudeMarinier@xwavesolutions.com> Vim 5.5, Zoltan Arpadffy
|
||||
Vim 5.6 )
|
||||
Vim 5.6)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
8.4 Directory conversion
|
||||
|
||||
Vim will internally convert any unix-style paths and even mixed unix/VMS
|
||||
paths into VMS style paths. Some typical conversions resemble:
|
||||
paths into VMS style paths. Some typical conversions resemble:
|
||||
|
||||
/abc/def/ghi -> abc:[def]ghi.
|
||||
/abc/def/ghi.j -> abc:[def]ghi.j
|
||||
@ -377,9 +381,9 @@ example: >
|
||||
Note: syntax is very important, otherwise VMS will recognize more parameters
|
||||
instead of one (resulting with: file not found)
|
||||
|
||||
2. Set up Vim as your internode editor. If Vim is not installed on your host,
|
||||
just set up your IP address, full Vim path including the server name and run
|
||||
the command procedure below: >
|
||||
2. Set up Vim as your internode editor. If Vim is not installed on your
|
||||
host, just set up your IP address, the full Vim path including the server name
|
||||
and run the command procedure below: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ if (p1 .eqs. "") .OR. (p2 .eqs. "") then goto usage
|
||||
$ set disp/create/node=<your_IP_here>/trans=tcpip
|
||||
@ -392,8 +396,8 @@ the command procedure below: >
|
||||
$ write sys$output " Example: @SETVIM.COM username passwd"
|
||||
$ end:
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Never use it in clustered environment (you do not need it), and load could
|
||||
be very-very slow, but even faster then a local Emacs. :-)
|
||||
Note: Never use it in a clustered environment (you do not need it), loading
|
||||
could be very-very slow, but even faster then a local Emacs. :-)
|
||||
|
||||
(Zoltan Arpadffy, Vim 5.6)
|
||||
|
||||
@ -404,7 +408,7 @@ If your terminal name is not known to Vim and it is trying to find the default
|
||||
one you will get the following message during start-up:
|
||||
---
|
||||
Terminal entry not found in termcap
|
||||
'unknown-terminal' not known. Available built-in terminals are:
|
||||
'unknown-terminal' not known. Available built-in terminals are:
|
||||
builtin_gui
|
||||
builtin_riscos
|
||||
builtin_amiga
|
||||
@ -422,13 +426,13 @@ defaulting to 'vt320'
|
||||
---
|
||||
The solution is to define default terminal name: >
|
||||
|
||||
$ ! unknown terminal name. let us use vt320 or ansi instead.
|
||||
$ ! unknown terminal name. Let us use vt320 or ansi instead.
|
||||
$ ! Note: it's case sensitive
|
||||
$ define term "vt320"
|
||||
|
||||
Terminals from VT100 to VT320 (as V300, VT220, VT200 ) do not need any extra
|
||||
keyboard mappings. They should work perfect as they are, including arrows,
|
||||
Ins, Del buttons etc. Except Backspace in GUI mode. To solve it, add to
|
||||
keyboard mappings. They should work perfect as they are, including arrows,
|
||||
Ins, Del buttons etc., except Backspace in GUI mode. To solve it, add to
|
||||
.gvimrc: >
|
||||
|
||||
inoremap <Del> <BS>
|
||||
@ -457,9 +461,9 @@ special commands to execute executables: >
|
||||
MCR <path>filename <parameters>
|
||||
|
||||
OpenVMS users always have to be aware that the Vim command :! "just" drop them
|
||||
to DCL prompt. This feature is possible to use without any problem with all
|
||||
to DCL prompt. This feature is possible to use without any problem with all
|
||||
DCL commands, but if we want to execute some program as XXD, CTAGS, JTAGS etc.
|
||||
we're running into trouble if we following the Vim documentation (see: help
|
||||
we're running into trouble if we follow the Vim documentation (see: help
|
||||
xxd).
|
||||
|
||||
Solution: Execute with the MC command and add the full path to the executable.
|
||||
@ -470,9 +474,9 @@ Example: Instead of :%!xxd command use: >
|
||||
... or in general: >
|
||||
:!mc <path>filename <parameters>
|
||||
|
||||
Note: You can use XXD, and CTAGS from GUI menu.
|
||||
Note: You can use XXD and CTAGS from GUI menu.
|
||||
|
||||
To customize ctags it is possible to define logical $CTAGS with standard
|
||||
To customize ctags it is possible to define the logical $CTAGS with standard
|
||||
parameters as: >
|
||||
|
||||
define/nolog CTAGS "--totals -o sys$login:tags"
|
||||
@ -488,7 +492,7 @@ documentation at http://ctags.sourceforge.net/ctags.html.
|
||||
If you want to use your .vimrc and .gvimrc from other platforms (e.g. Windows)
|
||||
you can get in trouble if you ftp that file(s): VMS has different end-of-line
|
||||
indication.
|
||||
The symptom is that ViM is not sourcing your .vimrc/.gvimrc, even if you say:
|
||||
The symptom is that Vim is not sourcing your .vimrc/.gvimrc, even if you say:
|
||||
>
|
||||
:so sys$login:.vimrc
|
||||
|
||||
@ -535,8 +539,8 @@ will be confused after a window-resize.
|
||||
|
||||
From 6.0 diff functionality has been implemented, but OpenVMS does not use
|
||||
GNU/Unix like diff therefore built in diff does not work.
|
||||
There is a simple solution to solve this anomaly. Install an Unix like diff
|
||||
and Vim will work perfect in diff mode too. You just have to redefine your
|
||||
There is a simple solution to solve this anomaly. Install a Unix like diff
|
||||
and Vim will work perfect in diff mode too. You just have to redefine your
|
||||
diff program as: >
|
||||
|
||||
define /nolog diff <GNU_PATH>diff.exe
|
||||
@ -551,16 +555,16 @@ boxes that is meant to solve GNU problems on OpenVMS.
|
||||
8.12 diff-mode
|
||||
|
||||
Vim 6.0 and higher supports vim diff-mode (See |new-diff-mode|, |diff-mode|
|
||||
and |08.7|). This uses the external program 'diff' and expects a Unix-like
|
||||
output format from diff. The standard VMS diff has a different output
|
||||
format. To use vim on VMS in diff-mode, you need to:
|
||||
and |08.7|). This uses the external program 'diff' and expects a Unix-like
|
||||
output format from diff. The standard VMS diff has a different output
|
||||
format. To use vim on VMS in diff-mode, you need to:
|
||||
1 Install a Unix-like diff program, e.g. GNU diff
|
||||
2 Tell vim to use the Unix-like diff for diff-mode.
|
||||
|
||||
You can download GNU diff from the VIM-VMS website, it is one of the GNU
|
||||
tools in http://www.polarhome.com/vim/files/gnu_tools.zip. I suggest to
|
||||
tools in http://www.polarhome.com/vim/files/gnu_tools.zip. I suggest to
|
||||
unpack it in a separate directory "GNU" and create a logical GNU: that
|
||||
points to that directory. e.g: >
|
||||
points to that directory, e.g: >
|
||||
|
||||
DEFINE GNU <DISK>:[<DIRECTORY>.BIN.GNU]
|
||||
|
||||
@ -569,9 +573,9 @@ prompt: >
|
||||
|
||||
GDIFF :== $GNU:DIFF.EXE
|
||||
|
||||
Now you need to tell vim to use the new diff program. Take the example
|
||||
Now you need to tell vim to use the new diff program. Take the example
|
||||
settings from |diff-diffexpr| and change the call to the external diff
|
||||
program to the new diff on VMS. Add this to your .vimrc file: >
|
||||
program to the new diff on VMS. Add this to your .vimrc file: >
|
||||
|
||||
" Set up vimdiff options
|
||||
if v:version >= 600
|
||||
@ -612,8 +616,8 @@ You can now compare files in 4 ways: >
|
||||
|
||||
8.13 Allow '$' in C keywords
|
||||
|
||||
DEC C uses many identifiers with '$' in them. This is not allowed in ANSI C,
|
||||
and vim recognises the '$' as the end of the identifier. You can change this
|
||||
DEC C uses many identifiers with '$' in them. This is not allowed in ANSI C,
|
||||
and vim recognises the '$' as the end of the identifier. You can change this
|
||||
with the |iskeyword|command.
|
||||
Add this command to your .vimrc file: >
|
||||
|
||||
@ -625,7 +629,7 @@ CS.VIM) and add this command: >
|
||||
set iskeyword+=$
|
||||
|
||||
Now word-based commands, e.g. the '*'-search-command and the CTRL-]
|
||||
tag-lookup, work on the whole identifier. (Ctags on VMS also supports '$' in
|
||||
tag-lookup, work on the whole identifier. (Ctags on VMS also supports '$' in
|
||||
C keywords since ctags version 5.1.)
|
||||
|
||||
( Coen Engelbarts, Vim 6.1)
|
||||
@ -633,8 +637,8 @@ C keywords since ctags version 5.1.)
|
||||
8.14 VIMTUTOR for beginners
|
||||
|
||||
It exits VIMTUTOR.COM DCL script that can help Vim beginners to learn/make
|
||||
first steps with Vim on OpenVMS. Depending of binary distribution you may start
|
||||
it with: >
|
||||
first steps with Vim on OpenVMS. Depending of binary distribution you may
|
||||
start it with: >
|
||||
|
||||
@vim:vimtutor
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -177,16 +177,16 @@ by setting a variable (ex. scp uses the variable g:netrw_scp_cmd,
|
||||
which is defaulted to "scp -q").
|
||||
|
||||
Ftp, an old protocol, seems to be blessed by numerous implementations.
|
||||
Unfortunately, some implementations are noisy (ie., add junk to the end
|
||||
Unfortunately, some implementations are noisy (i.e., add junk to the end
|
||||
of the file). Thus, concerned users may decide to write a NetReadFixup()
|
||||
function that will clean up after reading with their ftp. Some Unix systems
|
||||
(ie., FreeBSD) provide a utility called "fetch" which uses the ftp protocol
|
||||
(i.e., FreeBSD) provide a utility called "fetch" which uses the ftp protocol
|
||||
but is not noisy and more convenient, actually, for <netrw.vim> to use.
|
||||
Consequently, if "fetch" is executable, it will be used to do reads for
|
||||
ftp://... (and http://...) . See |netrw-var| for more about this.
|
||||
|
||||
For rcp, scp, sftp, and http, one may use network-oriented file transfers
|
||||
transparently; ie.
|
||||
transparently; i.e.
|
||||
>
|
||||
vim rcp://[user@]machine/path
|
||||
vim scp://[user@]machine/path
|
||||
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ that file. Your ftp must be able to use the <.netrc> file on its own, however.
|
||||
vim ftp://[user@]machine[[:#]portnumber]/path
|
||||
<
|
||||
However, ftp will often need to query the user for the userid and password.
|
||||
The latter will be done "silently"; ie. asterisks will show up instead of
|
||||
The latter will be done "silently"; i.e. asterisks will show up instead of
|
||||
the actually-typed-in password. Netrw will retain the userid and password
|
||||
for subsequent read/writes from the most recent transfer so subsequent
|
||||
transfers (read/write) to or from that machine will take place without
|
||||
@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ NETRW BROWSER VARIABLES *netrw-browse-var*
|
||||
g:netrw_timefmt specify format string to strftime() (%c)
|
||||
g:netrw_winsize specify initial size of new o/v windows
|
||||
|
||||
INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTORY BROWSING
|
||||
INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTORY BROWSING *file-explorer*
|
||||
|
||||
Netrw supports the browsing of directories on the local system and on remote
|
||||
hosts, including generating listing directories, entering directories, editing
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*print.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jul 05
|
||||
*print.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ used.
|
||||
printer.
|
||||
|
||||
On MS-Windows a dialog is displayed to allow selection
|
||||
of printer, paper size etc. To skip the dialog, use
|
||||
of printer, paper size etc. To skip the dialog, use
|
||||
the [!]. In this case the printer defined by
|
||||
'printdevice' is used, or, if 'printdevice' is empty,
|
||||
the system default printer.
|
||||
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ the current window's 'wrap' or 'linebreak' settings. The "wrap" item in
|
||||
'printoptions' can be used to switch wrapping off.
|
||||
The current highlighting colors are used in the printout, with the following
|
||||
considerations:
|
||||
1) The normal background is always rendered as white (i.e. blank paper.)
|
||||
1) The normal background is always rendered as white (i.e. blank paper).
|
||||
2) White text or the default foreground is rendered as black, so that it shows
|
||||
up!
|
||||
3) If 'background' is "dark", then the colours are darkened to compensate for
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*quickref.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 07
|
||||
*quickref.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -1171,7 +1171,7 @@ Context-sensitive completion on the command-line:
|
||||
|:xall| :xa[ll][!] or :wqall[!]
|
||||
Write all changed buffers and exit
|
||||
|
||||
|:stop| :st[op][!] Suspend VIM or start new shell. If 'aw' option
|
||||
|:stop| :st[op][!] Suspend VIM or start new shell. If 'aw' option
|
||||
is set and [!] not given write the buffer.
|
||||
|CTRL-Z| CTRL-Z Same as ":stop"
|
||||
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*rileft.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2003 May 07
|
||||
*rileft.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Avner Lottem
|
||||
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ bidi and is merely opting to present a functional means to display/enter/use
|
||||
right-to-left languages. An older hybrid solution in which direction is
|
||||
encoded for every character (or group of characters) are not supported either
|
||||
as this kind of support is out of the scope of a simple addition to an
|
||||
existing editor (and its not sanctioned by Unicode either).
|
||||
existing editor (and it's not sanctioned by Unicode either).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Highlights
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*russian.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 22
|
||||
*russian.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Vassily Ragosin
|
||||
@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Russian language localization and support in Vim *russian* *Russian*
|
||||
===============================================================================
|
||||
1. Introduction *russian-intro*
|
||||
|
||||
Russian language is supported perfectly well in Vim. You can type and view
|
||||
Russian language is supported perfectly well in Vim. You can type and view
|
||||
Russian text just as any other, without the need to tweak the settings.
|
||||
|
||||
===============================================================================
|
||||
@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ example,
|
||||
<
|
||||
In the latter case, you can switch between languages even if you do not have
|
||||
system Russian keyboard or independently from a system-wide keyboard settings.
|
||||
See 'keymap'. You can also map a key to switch between keyboards, if you
|
||||
choose the latter option. See |:map|.
|
||||
See 'keymap'. You can also map a key to switch between keyboards, if you
|
||||
choose the latter option. See |:map|.
|
||||
|
||||
For your convenience, to avoid switching between keyboards, when you need to
|
||||
enter Normal mode command, you can also set 'langmap' option:
|
||||
@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ different codepages from
|
||||
http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/ruvim/
|
||||
|
||||
Make sure that your Vim is at least 6.2.506 and use ruvim 0.5 or later for
|
||||
automatic installs. Vim also needs to be compiled with |+gettext| feature for
|
||||
automatic installs. Vim also needs to be compiled with |+gettext| feature for
|
||||
user interface items translations to work.
|
||||
|
||||
After downloading an archive from RuVim project, unpack it into your
|
||||
$VIMRUNTIME directory. We recommend using UTF-8 archive, if your version of
|
||||
$VIMRUNTIME directory. We recommend using UTF-8 archive, if your version of
|
||||
Vim is compiled with |+multi_byte| feature enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to use the Russian documentation, make sure you have set the
|
||||
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ In order to use the Russian documentation, make sure you have set the
|
||||
|
||||
-- If you are using Russian message translations in Win32 console, then
|
||||
you may see the output produced by "vim --help", "vim --version" commands
|
||||
and Win32 console window title appearing in a wrong codepage. This problem
|
||||
and Win32 console window title appearing in a wrong codepage. This problem
|
||||
is related to a bug in GNU gettext library and may be fixed in the future
|
||||
releases of gettext.
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*sign.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 May 22
|
||||
*sign.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Gordon Prieur
|
||||
@ -18,19 +18,19 @@ Sign Support Features *sign-support*
|
||||
|
||||
When a debugger or other IDE tool is driving an editor it needs to be able
|
||||
to give specific highlights which quickly tell the user useful information
|
||||
about the file. One example of this would be a debugger which had an icon
|
||||
in the left-hand column denoting a breakpoint. Another example might be an
|
||||
arrow representing the Program Counter (PC). The sign features allow both
|
||||
about the file. One example of this would be a debugger which had an icon
|
||||
in the left-hand column denoting a breakpoint. Another example might be an
|
||||
arrow representing the Program Counter (PC). The sign features allow both
|
||||
placement of a sign, or icon, in the left-hand side of the window and
|
||||
definition of a highlight which will be applied to that line. Displaying the
|
||||
definition of a highlight which will be applied to that line. Displaying the
|
||||
sign as an image is most likely only feasible in gvim (although Sun
|
||||
Microsystem's dtterm does support this its the only terminal emulator I know
|
||||
Microsystem's dtterm does support this it's the only terminal emulator I know
|
||||
of which does). A text sign and the highlight should be feasible in any color
|
||||
terminal emulator.
|
||||
|
||||
Signs and highlights are not useful just for debuggers. Sun's Visual
|
||||
Signs and highlights are not useful just for debuggers. Sun's Visual
|
||||
WorkShop uses signs and highlights to mark build errors and SourceBrowser
|
||||
hits. Additionally, the debugger supports 8 to 10 different signs and
|
||||
hits. Additionally, the debugger supports 8 to 10 different signs and
|
||||
highlight colors. |workshop| Same for Netbeans |netbeans|.
|
||||
|
||||
There are two steps in using signs:
|
||||
|
@ -1584,6 +1584,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME*
|
||||
45.3 usr_45.txt /*45.3*
|
||||
45.4 usr_45.txt /*45.4*
|
||||
45.5 usr_45.txt /*45.5*
|
||||
755 spell.txt /*755*
|
||||
90.1 usr_90.txt /*90.1*
|
||||
90.2 usr_90.txt /*90.2*
|
||||
90.3 usr_90.txt /*90.3*
|
||||
@ -2129,6 +2130,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME starting.txt /*$VIMRUNTIME*
|
||||
:mkexrc starting.txt /*:mkexrc*
|
||||
:mks starting.txt /*:mks*
|
||||
:mksession starting.txt /*:mksession*
|
||||
:mksp spell.txt /*:mksp*
|
||||
:mkspell spell.txt /*:mkspell*
|
||||
:mkv starting.txt /*:mkv*
|
||||
:mkvie starting.txt /*:mkvie*
|
||||
:mkview starting.txt /*:mkview*
|
||||
@ -3688,10 +3691,12 @@ E748 repeat.txt /*E748*
|
||||
E749 eval.txt /*E749*
|
||||
E75 vi_diff.txt /*E75*
|
||||
E750 repeat.txt /*E750*
|
||||
E751 spell.txt /*E751*
|
||||
E752 spell.txt /*E752*
|
||||
E753 spell.txt /*E753*
|
||||
E754 spell.txt /*E754*
|
||||
E756 spell.txt /*E756*
|
||||
E758 spell.txt /*E758*
|
||||
E759 spell.txt /*E759*
|
||||
E76 pattern.txt /*E76*
|
||||
E760 spell.txt /*E760*
|
||||
E77 message.txt /*E77*
|
||||
E78 motion.txt /*E78*
|
||||
E79 message.txt /*E79*
|
||||
@ -3998,6 +4003,7 @@ ZZ editing.txt /*ZZ*
|
||||
[pattern] pattern.txt /*[pattern]*
|
||||
[quotex] intro.txt /*[quotex]*
|
||||
[range] cmdline.txt /*[range]*
|
||||
[s spell.txt /*[s*
|
||||
[star motion.txt /*[star*
|
||||
[z fold.txt /*[z*
|
||||
[{ motion.txt /*[{*
|
||||
@ -4023,6 +4029,7 @@ ZZ editing.txt /*ZZ*
|
||||
]i tagsrch.txt /*]i*
|
||||
]m motion.txt /*]m*
|
||||
]p change.txt /*]p*
|
||||
]s spell.txt /*]s*
|
||||
]star motion.txt /*]star*
|
||||
]z fold.txt /*]z*
|
||||
]} motion.txt /*]}*
|
||||
@ -4579,6 +4586,7 @@ design-not develop.txt /*design-not*
|
||||
design-speed-size develop.txt /*design-speed-size*
|
||||
desktop-syntax syntax.txt /*desktop-syntax*
|
||||
desktop.vim syntax.txt /*desktop.vim*
|
||||
develop-spell develop.txt /*develop-spell*
|
||||
develop.txt develop.txt /*develop.txt*
|
||||
development develop.txt /*development*
|
||||
dh change.txt /*dh*
|
||||
@ -4808,6 +4816,7 @@ fcs_reason-variable eval.txt /*fcs_reason-variable*
|
||||
feature-list eval.txt /*feature-list*
|
||||
fetch pi_netrw.txt /*fetch*
|
||||
file-browser-5.2 version5.txt /*file-browser-5.2*
|
||||
file-explorer pi_netrw.txt /*file-explorer*
|
||||
file-formats editing.txt /*file-formats*
|
||||
file-pattern autocmd.txt /*file-pattern*
|
||||
file-read insert.txt /*file-read*
|
||||
@ -6219,8 +6228,12 @@ spec_chglog_release_info pi_spec.txt /*spec_chglog_release_info*
|
||||
special-buffers windows.txt /*special-buffers*
|
||||
speed-up tips.txt /*speed-up*
|
||||
spell spell.txt /*spell*
|
||||
spell-affix-mbyte spell.txt /*spell-affix-mbyte*
|
||||
spell-affix-vim spell.txt /*spell-affix-vim*
|
||||
spell-file-format spell.txt /*spell-file-format*
|
||||
spell-mkspell spell.txt /*spell-mkspell*
|
||||
spell-quickstart spell.txt /*spell-quickstart*
|
||||
spell-wordlist-format spell.txt /*spell-wordlist-format*
|
||||
spell.txt spell.txt /*spell.txt*
|
||||
split() eval.txt /*split()*
|
||||
splitfind windows.txt /*splitfind*
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*tips.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 23
|
||||
*tips.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -129,26 +129,26 @@ Switching screens in an xterm *xterm-screens* *xterm-save-screen*
|
||||
:the same thing as each other for a given xterm setup.
|
||||
|
||||
They not necessarily do the same thing, as this may be a termcap vs.
|
||||
terminfo problem. You should be aware that there are two databases for
|
||||
terminfo problem. You should be aware that there are two databases for
|
||||
describing attributes of a particular type of terminal: termcap and
|
||||
terminfo. This can cause differences when the entries differ AND when of
|
||||
terminfo. This can cause differences when the entries differ AND when of
|
||||
the programs in question one uses terminfo and the other uses termcap
|
||||
(also see |+terminfo|).
|
||||
|
||||
In your particular problem, you are looking for the control sequences
|
||||
^[[?47h and ^[[?47l. These switch between xterms alternate and main screen
|
||||
buffer. As a quick workaround a command sequence like >
|
||||
^[[?47h and ^[[?47l. These switch between xterms alternate and main screen
|
||||
buffer. As a quick workaround a command sequence like >
|
||||
echo -n "^[[?47h"; vim ... ; echo -n "^[[?47l"
|
||||
may do what you want. (My notation ^[ means the ESC character, further down
|
||||
may do what you want. (My notation ^[ means the ESC character, further down
|
||||
you'll see that the databases use \E instead).
|
||||
|
||||
On startup, vim echoes the value of the termcap variable ti (terminfo:
|
||||
smcup) to the terminal. When exiting, it echoes te (terminfo: rmcup). Thus
|
||||
smcup) to the terminal. When exiting, it echoes te (terminfo: rmcup). Thus
|
||||
these two variables are the correct place where the above mentioned control
|
||||
sequences should go.
|
||||
|
||||
Compare your xterm termcap entry (found in /etc/termcap) with your xterm
|
||||
terminfo entry (retrieved with /usr/5bin/infocmp -C xterm). Both should
|
||||
terminfo entry (retrieved with /usr/5bin/infocmp -C xterm). Both should
|
||||
contain entries similar to: >
|
||||
:te=\E[2J\E[?47l\E8:ti=\E7\E[?47h:
|
||||
|
||||
@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ be able to give comments to the parts of the mapping. >
|
||||
|
||||
(<> notation |<>|. Note that this is all typed literally. ^W is "^" "W", not
|
||||
CTRL-W. You can copy/paste this into Vim if '<' is not included in
|
||||
'cpoptions')
|
||||
'cpoptions'.)
|
||||
|
||||
Note that the last comment starts with |", because the ":execute" command
|
||||
doesn't accept a comment directly.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_02.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jun 08
|
||||
*usr_02.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ the editor: "ZZ". This will only close the help window, not exit Vim.
|
||||
As you read the help text, you will notice some text enclosed in vertical bars
|
||||
(for example, |help|). This indicates a hyperlink. If you position the
|
||||
cursor anywhere between the bars and press CTRL-] (jump to tag), the help
|
||||
system takes you to the indicated subject. (For reasons not discussed here,
|
||||
system takes you to the indicated subject. (For reasons not discussed here,
|
||||
the Vim terminology for a hyperlink is tag. So CTRL-] jumps to the location
|
||||
of the tag given by the word under the cursor.)
|
||||
After a few jumps, you might want to go back. CTRL-T (pop tag) takes you
|
||||
@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ example, use the following command: >
|
||||
|
||||
The table with all mode prefixes can be found here: |help-context|.
|
||||
|
||||
Special keys are enclosed in angle brackets. To find help on the up-arrow key
|
||||
Special keys are enclosed in angle brackets. To find help on the up-arrow key
|
||||
in Insert mode, for instance, use this command: >
|
||||
|
||||
:help i_<Up>
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_03.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Feb 08
|
||||
*usr_03.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ the <Left> and <Right> cursor keys when necessary.
|
||||
Pressing <Enter> executes the command.
|
||||
|
||||
Note:
|
||||
The characters .*[]^%/\?~$ have special meaning. If you want to use
|
||||
The characters .*[]^%/\?~$ have special meanings. If you want to use
|
||||
them in a search you must put a \ in front of them. See below.
|
||||
|
||||
To find the next occurrence of the same string use the "n" command. Use this
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_08.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jun 04
|
||||
*usr_08.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ the bottom one the code that uses these variables.
|
||||
|
||||
The CTRL-W w command can be used to jump between the windows. If you are in
|
||||
the top window, CTRL-W w jumps to the window below it. If you are in the
|
||||
bottom window it will jump to the first window. (CTRL-W CTRL-W does the same
|
||||
bottom window it will jump to the first window. (CTRL-W CTRL-W does the same
|
||||
thing, in case you let go of the CTRL key a bit later.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_09.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2001 Sep 03
|
||||
*usr_09.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ select text in a standard manner. The X Window system also has a standard
|
||||
system for using the mouse. Unfortunately, these two standards are not the
|
||||
same.
|
||||
Fortunately, you can customize Vim. You can make the behavior of the mouse
|
||||
work like an X Window system mouse or a Microsoft Windows mouse. The following
|
||||
work like an X Window system mouse or a Microsoft Windows mouse. The following
|
||||
command makes the mouse behave like an X Window mouse: >
|
||||
|
||||
:behave xterm
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_10.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 15
|
||||
*usr_10.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ as input. The output of this command then replaces the selected block.
|
||||
Because this summarizes badly if you are unfamiliar with UNIX filters, take
|
||||
a look at an example. The sort command sorts a file. If you execute the
|
||||
following command, the unsorted file input.txt will be sorted and written to
|
||||
output.txt. (This works on both UNIX and Microsoft Windows.) >
|
||||
output.txt. (This works on both UNIX and Microsoft Windows.) >
|
||||
|
||||
sort <input.txt >output.txt
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_21.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Oct 10
|
||||
*usr_21.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ looks like this: >
|
||||
:set viminfo='1000
|
||||
|
||||
The f option controls whether global marks (A-Z and 0-9) are stored. If this
|
||||
option is 0, none are stored. If it is 1 or you do not specify an f option,
|
||||
option is 0, none are stored. If it is 1 or you do not specify an f option,
|
||||
the marks are stored. You want this feature, so now you have this: >
|
||||
|
||||
:set viminfo='1000,f1
|
||||
@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ work and pick up where you left off the next day. You can do this by saving
|
||||
your editing session and restoring it the next day.
|
||||
A Vim session contains all the information about what you are editing.
|
||||
This includes things such as the file list, window layout, global variables,
|
||||
options and other information. (Exactly what is remembered is controlled by
|
||||
options and other information. (Exactly what is remembered is controlled by
|
||||
the 'sessionoptions' option, described below.)
|
||||
The following command creates a session file: >
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_22.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jun 16
|
||||
*usr_22.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 10
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ shorter to type: >
|
||||
The output could look like this:
|
||||
|
||||
1 #h "help.txt" line 62 ~
|
||||
2 %l+ "usr_21.txt" line 1 ~
|
||||
2 %a+ "usr_21.txt" line 1 ~
|
||||
3 "usr_toc.txt" line 1 ~
|
||||
|
||||
The first column contains the buffer number. You can use this to edit the
|
||||
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ and the line number where the cursor was the last time.
|
||||
u Buffer is unlisted |unlisted-buffer|.
|
||||
% Current buffer.
|
||||
# Alternate buffer.
|
||||
l Buffer is loaded and displayed.
|
||||
a Buffer is loaded and displayed.
|
||||
h Buffer is loaded but hidden.
|
||||
= Buffer is read-only.
|
||||
- Buffer is not modifiable, the 'modifiable' option is off.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_24.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2003 Aug 18
|
||||
*usr_24.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ Vim do that use this command: >
|
||||
When you now type a text like "(example)", as soon as you type the ) Vim will
|
||||
briefly move the cursor to the matching (, keep it there for half a second,
|
||||
and move back to where you were typing.
|
||||
In case there is not matching (, Vim will beep. Then you know that you
|
||||
In case there is no matching (, Vim will beep. Then you know that you
|
||||
might have forgotten the ( somewhere, or typed a ) too many.
|
||||
The match will also be shown for [] and {} pairs. You don't have to wait
|
||||
with typing the next character, as soon as Vim sees it the cursor will move
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_25.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2003 Jun 21
|
||||
*usr_25.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ command: >
|
||||
|
||||
:runtime macros/justify.vim
|
||||
|
||||
This Vim script file defines a new visual command "_j". To justify a block of
|
||||
This Vim script file defines a new visual command "_j". To justify a block of
|
||||
text, highlight the text in Visual mode and then execute "_j".
|
||||
Look in the file for more explanations. To go there, do "gf" on this name:
|
||||
$VIMRUNTIME/macros/justify.vim.
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_42.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2002 Oct 08
|
||||
*usr_42.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Thus each name in {menu-item} has its priority number.
|
||||
|
||||
SPECIAL CHARACTERS
|
||||
|
||||
The {menu-item} in this example is "&File.&Save<Tab>:w". This brings up an
|
||||
The {menu-item} in this example is "&File.&Save<Tab>:w". This brings up an
|
||||
important point: {menu-item} must be one word. If you want to put a dot,
|
||||
space or tabs in the name, you either use the <> notation (<Space> and <Tab>,
|
||||
for instance) or use the backslash (\) escape. >
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*usr_44.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2002 Oct 10
|
||||
*usr_44.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
|
||||
@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ before the top of the screen: >
|
||||
|
||||
If it cannot figure out where it is in that space, it starts looking farther
|
||||
and farther back until it figures out what to do. But it looks no farther
|
||||
back than 500 lines. (A large "maxlines" slows down processing. A small one
|
||||
back than 500 lines. (A large "maxlines" slows down processing. A small one
|
||||
might cause synchronization to fail.)
|
||||
To make synchronizing go a bit faster, tell Vim which syntax items can be
|
||||
skipped. Every match and region that only needs to be used when actually
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*version5.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jun 16
|
||||
*version5.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -562,11 +562,11 @@ New options *added-options*
|
||||
|
||||
'hlsearch' Highlight all matches with the last used search pattern.
|
||||
|
||||
'hkmapp' Phonetic Hebrew mapping (Ilya Dogolazky).
|
||||
'hkmapp' Phonetic Hebrew mapping. (Ilya Dogolazky)
|
||||
|
||||
'iconstring' Define the name of the icon, when not empty. (version 5.2: the
|
||||
'iconstring' Define the name of the icon, when not empty. (Version 5.2: the
|
||||
string is used literally, a newline can be used to make two
|
||||
lines).
|
||||
lines.)
|
||||
|
||||
'lazyredraw' Don't redraw the screen while executing macros, registers or
|
||||
other not typed commands.
|
||||
@ -591,9 +591,9 @@ New options *added-options*
|
||||
changing the value of 'tabstop'. Makes it more easy to keep
|
||||
'ts' at 8, while still getting four spaces for a <Tab>.
|
||||
|
||||
'titlestring' String for the window title, when not empty. (version 5.2:
|
||||
'titlestring' String for the window title, when not empty. (Version 5.2:
|
||||
this string is used literally, a newline can be used to make
|
||||
two lines).
|
||||
two lines.)
|
||||
|
||||
'verbose' Level of verbosity. Makes it possible to show which .vimrc,
|
||||
.exrc, .viminfo files etc. are used for initializing. Also
|
||||
@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ Autocommands:
|
||||
- VimLeave autocommands are executed after writing the viminfo file, instead
|
||||
of before. |VimLeave|
|
||||
- Allow changing autocommands while executing them. This allows for
|
||||
self-modifying autocommands. (idea from Goldberg)
|
||||
self-modifying autocommands. (idea from Goldberg)
|
||||
- When using autocommands with two or more patterns, could not split
|
||||
":if/:endif" over two lines. Now all matching autocommands are executed in
|
||||
one do_cmdline().
|
||||
@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ in the wrong line and the window to be scrolled (Acevedo).
|
||||
|
||||
After ":set all&", 'lines' and 'ttytype' were still non-default, because the
|
||||
defaults never got set. Now the defaults for 'lines' and 'columns' are set
|
||||
after detecting the window size. 'term' and 'ttytype' defaults are set when
|
||||
after detecting the window size. 'term' and 'ttytype' defaults are set when
|
||||
detecting the terminal type.
|
||||
|
||||
For (most) non-Unix systems, don't add file names with illegal characters when
|
||||
@ -1357,7 +1357,7 @@ caused various errors and a crash.
|
||||
DJGPP version could not save long lines (>64000) for undo.
|
||||
|
||||
"yw" on the last char in the file didn't work. Also fixed "6x" at the end of
|
||||
the line. "6X" at the start of a line fails, but does not break a mapping. In
|
||||
the line. "6X" at the start of a line fails, but does not break a mapping. In
|
||||
general, a movement for an operator doesn't beep or flush a mapping, but when
|
||||
there is nothing to operate on it beeps (this is Vi compatible).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1777,7 +1777,7 @@ Added "g]" to always do ":tselect" for the ident under the cursor.
|
||||
Added ":tjump" and ":stjump" commands.
|
||||
Improved listing of ":tselect" when tag names are a bit long.
|
||||
|
||||
Included patches for the Macintosh version. Also for Python interface.
|
||||
Included patches for the Macintosh version. Also for Python interface.
|
||||
(St-Amant)
|
||||
|
||||
":buf foo" now also restores cursor column, when the buffer was used before.
|
||||
@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ a printable character replaces the selection.
|
||||
- Added 'mousemodel' option: Change use of mouse buttons.
|
||||
- Added 'keymodel' option: tells to use shifted special keys to start a
|
||||
Visual or Select mode selection.
|
||||
- Added ":behave". Can be used to quickly set 'selectmode', 'mousemodel'
|
||||
- Added ":behave". Can be used to quickly set 'selectmode', 'mousemodel'
|
||||
and 'keymodel' for MS-Windows and xterm behavior.
|
||||
- The xterm-like selection is now called modeless selection.
|
||||
- Visual mode mappings and menus are used in Select mode. They automatically
|
||||
@ -2150,7 +2150,7 @@ New functions *new-functions-5.2*
|
||||
|browse()| puts up a file requester when available. (Negri)
|
||||
|escape()| escapes characters in a string with a backslash.
|
||||
|fnamemodify()| modifies a file name.
|
||||
|input()| asks the user to enter a line. (Aaron) There is a separate
|
||||
|input()| asks the user to enter a line. (Aaron) There is a separate
|
||||
history for lines typed for the input() function.
|
||||
|argc()|
|
||||
|argv()| can be used to access the argument list.
|
||||
@ -2394,7 +2394,7 @@ events. Makes cursor blinking work for Terhaar, breaks it for me.
|
||||
|
||||
Non-text in ":list" output is highlighted with NonText.
|
||||
|
||||
Added text objects: "i(" and "i)" as synonym for "ib". "i{" and "i}" as
|
||||
Added text objects: "i(" and "i)" as synonym for "ib". "i{" and "i}" as
|
||||
synonym for "iB". New: "i<" and "i>", to select <thing>. All this also for
|
||||
"a" objects.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2607,7 +2607,7 @@ Graceful handling of NULLs in drag-dropped file list. Handle passing NULL to
|
||||
Fullname_save(). (Negri)
|
||||
|
||||
Win32: ":!start" to invoke a program without opening a console, swapping
|
||||
screens, or waiting for completion in either console or gui version. e.g. you
|
||||
screens, or waiting for completion in either console or gui version, e.g. you
|
||||
can type ":!start winfile". ALSO fixes "can't delete swapfile after spawning
|
||||
a shell" bug. (enhancement of Aaron patch) (Negri)
|
||||
|
||||
@ -3783,7 +3783,7 @@ Macintosh: (St-Amant)
|
||||
- Weak-linking of Python 1.5.1 (only on PPC). Python is supported when the
|
||||
library is available.
|
||||
- If an error is encountered when sourcing the users .vimrc, the alert box now
|
||||
shows right away with the OK button defaulted. There's no more "Delete"-key
|
||||
shows right away with the OK button defaulted. There's no more "Delete"-key
|
||||
sign at the start of each line
|
||||
- Better management of environment variables. Now $VIM is calculated only
|
||||
once, not regenerated every time it is used.
|
||||
@ -4067,7 +4067,7 @@ Various XIM and multi-byte fixes:
|
||||
- Fix user cannot see his language while he is typing his language with
|
||||
off-the-spot method. (Nagano)
|
||||
- Fix preedit position using text/edit area (using gui.wid). (Nagano)
|
||||
- remove 'fix dead key' codes. It was needed since XNFocusWindow was
|
||||
- remove 'fix dead key' codes. It was needed since XNFocusWindow was
|
||||
"x11_window", XNFocusWindow is now gui.wid. (Nagano)
|
||||
- Remove some compile warnings and fix typos. (Namsh)
|
||||
- For status area, check the gtk+ version while Vim runs. I believe it is
|
||||
@ -4783,7 +4783,7 @@ translated to "}" before the shell got it. Now don't remove backslashes when
|
||||
wildcards are going to be expanded.
|
||||
|
||||
Unix: ":e /tmp/$uid" didn't work. When expanding environment variables in a
|
||||
file name doesn't work, use the shell to expand the file name. ":e /tmp/$tty"
|
||||
file name doesn't work, use the shell to expand the file name. ":e /tmp/$tty"
|
||||
still doesn't work though.
|
||||
|
||||
"make test" didn't always work on DOS/Windows for test30, because it depended
|
||||
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*version6.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Jan 26
|
||||
*version6.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 04
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -956,7 +956,7 @@ Use "--remote" to have files be edited in an already running Vim.
|
||||
Use "--remote-wait" to do the same and wait for the editing to finish.
|
||||
Use "--remote-send" to send commands from one Vim to another.
|
||||
Use "--remote-expr" to have an expression evaluated in another Vim.
|
||||
Use "--serverlist" to list the currently available Vim servers. (X only)
|
||||
Use "--serverlist" to list the currently available Vim servers. (X only)
|
||||
There are also functions to communicate between the server and the client.
|
||||
|remote_send()| |remote_expr()|
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ window). This makes it easy to navigate through the error list.
|
||||
- |:cwindow| takes care that there is a quickfix window only when there are
|
||||
recognized errors. (Dan Sharp)
|
||||
|
||||
- Quickfix also knows "info", next to "warning" and "error" types. "%I" can be
|
||||
- Quickfix also knows "info", next to "warning" and "error" types. "%I" can be
|
||||
used for the start of a multi-line informational message. (Tony Leneis)
|
||||
- The "%p" argument can be used in 'errorformat' to get the column number from
|
||||
a line where "^" points to the column. (Stefan Roemer)
|
||||
@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ The View also contains the local argument list and manually created, opened
|
||||
and closed folds.
|
||||
|
||||
Added the ":loadview" command and the 'viewdir' option: Allows for saving and
|
||||
restoring views of a file with simple commands. ":mkview 1" saves view 1 for
|
||||
restoring views of a file with simple commands. ":mkview 1" saves view 1 for
|
||||
the current file, ":loadview 1" loads it again. Also allows quickly switching
|
||||
between two views on one file. And saving and restoring manual folds and the
|
||||
folding state.
|
||||
@ -3303,7 +3303,7 @@ open the GUI window early to be able to display the messages and pop up the
|
||||
dialog.
|
||||
|
||||
"r<CR>" on a multi-byte character deleted only the first byte of the
|
||||
character. "3r<CR>" deleted three bytes instead of three characters.
|
||||
character. "3r<CR>" deleted three bytes instead of three characters.
|
||||
|
||||
When interrupting reading a file, Vi considers the buffer modified. Added the
|
||||
'i' flag in 'cpoptions' flag for this (we don't want it modified to be able to
|
||||
@ -3830,7 +3830,7 @@ Problem: VMS: Printing doesn't work, the file is deleted too quickly.
|
||||
No longer need the VMS specific printing menu.
|
||||
gethostname() is not available with VAXC.
|
||||
The makefile was lacking selection of the tiny-huge feature set.
|
||||
Solution: Adjust the 'printexpr' option default. Fix the other problems and
|
||||
Solution: Adjust the 'printexpr' option default. Fix the other problems and
|
||||
update the documentation. (Zoltan Arpadffy)
|
||||
Files: runtime/doc/os_vms.txt, runtime/menu.vim, src/INSTALLvms.txt,
|
||||
src/Make_vms.mms, src/option.c, src/os_unix.c, src/os_vms_conf.h
|
||||
@ -3843,7 +3843,7 @@ Files: src/ops.c
|
||||
|
||||
Patch 6.0.029
|
||||
Problem: When making a change in line 1, then in line 2 and then deleting
|
||||
line 1, undo info could be wrong. Only when the changes are undone
|
||||
line 1, undo info could be wrong. Only when the changes are undone
|
||||
at once. (Gerhard Hochholzer)
|
||||
Solution: When not saving a line for undo because it was already done
|
||||
before, remember for which entry the last line must be computed.
|
||||
@ -3891,7 +3891,7 @@ Files: runtime/menu.vim
|
||||
|
||||
Patch 6.0.036
|
||||
Problem: OS/2, MS-DOS and MS-Windows: Using a path that starts with a
|
||||
slash in 'tags' doesn't work as expected. (Mathias Koehrer
|
||||
slash in 'tags' doesn't work as expected. (Mathias Koehrer)
|
||||
Solution: Only use the drive, not the whole path to the current directory.
|
||||
Also make it work for "c:dir/file".
|
||||
Files: src/misc2.c
|
||||
@ -6127,7 +6127,7 @@ New message translation for Norwegian. (
|
||||
New color scheme:
|
||||
desert (Hans Fugal)
|
||||
|
||||
Arabic specific features. 'arabicshape', 'termbidi', 'arabic' and
|
||||
Arabic specific features. 'arabicshape', 'termbidi', 'arabic' and
|
||||
'rightleftcmd' options. (Nadim Shaikli & Isam Bayazidi)
|
||||
|
||||
Support for neXtaw GUI toolkit, mostly like Athena. (Alexey Froloff)
|
||||
@ -6810,7 +6810,7 @@ Files: runtime/filetype.vim, runtime/plugin/gzip.vim
|
||||
|
||||
Patch 6.1.056
|
||||
Problem: Loading the Syntax menu can take quite a bit of time.
|
||||
Solution: Add the "skip_syntax_sel_menu" variable. When its defined the
|
||||
Solution: Add the "skip_syntax_sel_menu" variable. When it's defined the
|
||||
available syntax files are not in the Syntax menu.
|
||||
Files: runtime/doc/gui.txt, runtime/menu.vim
|
||||
|
||||
@ -7640,7 +7640,7 @@ Problem: The extra mouse buttons found on some mice don't work.
|
||||
Solution: Support two extra buttons for MS-Windows. (Michael Geddes)
|
||||
Files: runtime/doc/term.txt, src/edit.c, src/ex_getln.c, src/gui.c,
|
||||
src/gui_w32.c, src/gui_w48.c, src/keymap.h, src/message.c,
|
||||
src/misc1.c, src/misc2.c, src/normal.c. src/vim.h
|
||||
src/misc1.c, src/misc2.c, src/normal.c, src/vim.h
|
||||
|
||||
Patch 6.1.185 (depends on 6.1.182)
|
||||
Problem: Can't compile without +comments feature.
|
||||
|
53
runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1
Normal file
53
runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
|
||||
.TH VIMDIFF 1 "30 mars 2001"
|
||||
.SH NOM
|
||||
vimdiff \- ouvre deux ou trois versions d'un fichier dans Vim et affiche
|
||||
leurs différences
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B vimdiff
|
||||
[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B gvimdiff
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.B Vimdiff
|
||||
démarre
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
avec deux (ou trois) fichiers.
|
||||
Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fenêtre.
|
||||
Les différences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
|
||||
C'est un outil très pratique pour visualiser et reporter les
|
||||
changements entre deux versions d'un même fichier.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Consulter vim(1) pour des informations sur l'éditeur Vim lui-même.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Si
|
||||
.B gvimdiff
|
||||
est invoqué, l'IHM graphique est démarrée quand elle est disponible.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
L'option 'diff' est activée dans chacune des fenêtres, ce qui provoque la mise
|
||||
en surbrillance des différences.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Les options 'wrap' et 'scrollbind' sont activées pour donner un aspect
|
||||
agréable au texte.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
L'option 'foldmethod' est fixée à "diff", ce qui replie les lignes consécutives
|
||||
identiques. 'foldcolumn' est fixé à 2 pour trouver les replis rapidement et
|
||||
les ouvrir ou les fermer facilement.
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
La fenêtre de Vim est partagée verticalement afin d'afficher les lignes
|
||||
correspondantes les unes en face des autres, comme si l'argument "\-O" était
|
||||
spécifié. Utilisez l'argument "\-o" pour obtenir un partage horizontal à la
|
||||
place.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Pour connaître les autres arguments disponibles, consultez vim(1).
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
La majeure partie de
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
a été écrite par Bram Moolenaar, avec l'aide de nombreux autres contributeurs.
|
||||
Voir ":help credits" dans
|
||||
.B Vim.
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-12.
|
53
runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
53
runtime/doc/vimdiff-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
|
||||
.TH VIMDIFF 1 "30 mars 2001"
|
||||
.SH NOM
|
||||
vimdiff \- ouvre deux ou trois versions d'un fichier dans Vim et affiche
|
||||
leurs différences
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B vimdiff
|
||||
[options] fichier1 fichier2 [fichier3]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B gvimdiff
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.B Vimdiff
|
||||
démarre
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
avec deux (ou trois) fichiers.
|
||||
Chaque fichier est ouvert dans sa propre fenêtre.
|
||||
Les différences entres ces fichiers sont mises en surbrillance.
|
||||
C'est un outil très pratique pour visualiser et reporter les
|
||||
changements entre deux versions d'un même fichier.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Consulter vim(1) pour des informations sur l'éditeur Vim lui-même.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Si
|
||||
.B gvimdiff
|
||||
est invoqué, l'IHM graphique est démarrée quand elle est disponible.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
L'option 'diff' est activée dans chacune des fenêtres, ce qui provoque la mise
|
||||
en surbrillance des différences.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Les options 'wrap' et 'scrollbind' sont activées pour donner un aspect
|
||||
agréable au texte.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
L'option 'foldmethod' est fixée à "diff", ce qui replie les lignes consécutives
|
||||
identiques. 'foldcolumn' est fixé à 2 pour trouver les replis rapidement et
|
||||
les ouvrir ou les fermer facilement.
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
La fenêtre de Vim est partagée verticalement afin d'afficher les lignes
|
||||
correspondantes les unes en face des autres, comme si l'argument "\-O" était
|
||||
spécifié. Utilisez l'argument "\-o" pour obtenir un partage horizontal à la
|
||||
place.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Pour connaître les autres arguments disponibles, consultez vim(1).
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
La majeure partie de
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
a été écrite par Bram Moolenaar, avec l'aide de nombreux autres contributeurs.
|
||||
Voir ":help credits" dans
|
||||
.B Vim.
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03-12.
|
@ -1,12 +1,10 @@
|
||||
VIMDIFF(1) VIMDIFF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIMDIFF(1) VIMDIFF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
vimdiff - edit two or three versions of a file with Vim
|
||||
and show differences
|
||||
vimdiff - edit two or three versions of a file with Vim and show dif-
|
||||
ferences
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
vimdiff [options] file1 file2 [file3]
|
||||
@ -14,30 +12,25 @@ SYNOPSIS
|
||||
gvimdiff
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Vimdiff starts Vim on two (or three) files. Each file
|
||||
gets its own window. The differences between the files
|
||||
are highlighted. This is a nice way to inspect changes
|
||||
and to move changes from one version to another version of
|
||||
the same file.
|
||||
Vimdiff starts Vim on two (or three) files. Each file gets its own
|
||||
window. The differences between the files are highlighted. This is a
|
||||
nice way to inspect changes and to move changes from one version to
|
||||
another version of the same file.
|
||||
|
||||
See vim(1) for details about Vim itself.
|
||||
|
||||
When started as gvimdiff the GUI will be started, if
|
||||
available.
|
||||
When started as gvimdiff the GUI will be started, if available.
|
||||
|
||||
In each window the 'diff' option will be set, which causes
|
||||
the differences to be highlighted.
|
||||
The 'wrap' and 'scrollbind' options are set to make the
|
||||
text look good.
|
||||
The 'foldmethod' option is set to "diff", which puts
|
||||
ranges of lines without changes in a fold. 'foldcolumn'
|
||||
is set to two to make it easy to spot the folds and open
|
||||
or close them.
|
||||
In each window the 'diff' option will be set, which causes the differ-
|
||||
ences to be highlighted.
|
||||
The 'wrap' and 'scrollbind' options are set to make the text look good.
|
||||
The 'foldmethod' option is set to "diff", which puts ranges of lines
|
||||
without changes in a fold. 'foldcolumn' is set to two to make it easy
|
||||
to spot the folds and open or close them.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
Vertical splits are used to align the lines, as if the
|
||||
"-O" argument was used. To use horizontal splits intead,
|
||||
use the "-o" argument.
|
||||
Vertical splits are used to align the lines, as if the "-O" argument
|
||||
was used. To use horizontal splits intead, use the "-o" argument.
|
||||
|
||||
For all other arguments see vim(1).
|
||||
|
||||
@ -45,22 +38,9 @@ SEE ALSO
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Most of Vim was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help
|
||||
from others. See ":help credits" in Vim.
|
||||
Most of Vim was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
|
||||
See ":help credits" in Vim.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2001 March 30 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2001 March 30 VIMDIFF(1)
|
||||
|
55
runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1
Normal file
55
runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
|
||||
.TH VIMTUTOR 1 "2 avril 2001"
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B vimtutor [langue]
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
lance le tutoriel
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
\.
|
||||
Il copie d'abord le fichier du tutoriel, afin que vous puissiez le modifier
|
||||
sans altérer le fichier original.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premières commandes
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
L'argument optionnel [langue] est le nom d'une langue, spécifiée par son
|
||||
symbole à deux lettres, tels que "it" ou "es". Si l'argument [langue] est omis,
|
||||
la langue de la région linguistique actuelle sera retenue. Si le tutoriel est
|
||||
disponible dans cette langue, il est proposé. Sinon, c'est la version anglaise
|
||||
qui est proposée.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
est toujours lancé en mode Compatible Vi.
|
||||
.SH FICHIERS
|
||||
.TP 15
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.langue]
|
||||
Les fichiers textes de
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.TP 15
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor.vim
|
||||
Le script Vim utilisé pour copier les fichiers texte de
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
a été écrit à l'origine pour Vi par Michael C. Pierce et Robert K. Ware, de la
|
||||
Colorado School of Mines, en reprenant des idées émises par Charles Smith, de
|
||||
la Colorado State University.
|
||||
E-mail : bware@mines.colorado.edu.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Il a été modifié pour
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
par Bram Moolenaar.
|
||||
Pour connaître le nom des traducteurs, consultez les fichiers textes du
|
||||
tutoriel.
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-27.
|
55
runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
55
runtime/doc/vimtutor-fr.UTF-8.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
|
||||
.TH VIMTUTOR 1 "2 avril 2001"
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
vimtutor \- tutoriel Vim
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B vimtutor [langue]
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
lance le tutoriel
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
\.
|
||||
Il copie d'abord le fichier du tutoriel, afin que vous puissiez le modifier
|
||||
sans altérer le fichier original.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
est utile pour les personnes souhaitant apprendre leurs premières commandes
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
L'argument optionnel [langue] est le nom d'une langue, spécifiée par son
|
||||
symbole à deux lettres, tels que "it" ou "es". Si l'argument [langue] est omis,
|
||||
la langue de la région linguistique actuelle sera retenue. Si le tutoriel est
|
||||
disponible dans cette langue, il est proposé. Sinon, c'est la version anglaise
|
||||
qui est proposée.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
est toujours lancé en mode Compatible Vi.
|
||||
.SH FICHIERS
|
||||
.TP 15
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.langue]
|
||||
Les fichiers textes de
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.TP 15
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor.vim
|
||||
Le script Vim utilisé pour copier les fichiers texte de
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
.B Vimtutor
|
||||
a été écrit à l'origine pour Vi par Michael C. Pierce et Robert K. Ware, de la
|
||||
Colorado School of Mines, en reprenant des idées émises par Charles Smith, de
|
||||
la Colorado State University.
|
||||
E-mail : bware@mines.colorado.edu.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Il a été modifié pour
|
||||
.B Vim
|
||||
par Bram Moolenaar.
|
||||
Pour connaître le nom des traducteurs, consultez les fichiers textes du
|
||||
tutoriel.
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
vim(1)
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-27.
|
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
|
||||
*visual.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Dec 29
|
||||
*visual.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Apr 01
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
||||
@ -88,8 +88,11 @@ linewise Visual Visual blockwise Visual Normal
|
||||
|
||||
*gv* *v_gv*
|
||||
gv Start Visual mode with the same area as the previous
|
||||
area and the same mode. In Visual mode the current and
|
||||
the previous Visual area are exchanged.
|
||||
area and the same mode.
|
||||
In Visual mode the current and the previous Visual
|
||||
area are exchanged.
|
||||
After using "p" or "P" in Visual mode the text that
|
||||
was put will be selected.
|
||||
|
||||
*<LeftMouse>*
|
||||
<LeftMouse> Set the current cursor position. If Visual mode is
|
||||
@ -272,7 +275,7 @@ See |v_b_I_example|.
|
||||
|
||||
Visual-block Append *v_b_A*
|
||||
With a blockwise selection, A{string}<ESC> will append {string} to the end of
|
||||
block on every line of the block. There is some differing behavior where the
|
||||
block on every line of the block. There is some differing behavior where the
|
||||
block RHS is not straight, due to different line lengths:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Block was created with <C-v>$
|
||||
@ -297,12 +300,12 @@ all lines.
|
||||
|
||||
*v_b_<*
|
||||
Visual-block Shift *v_b_>*
|
||||
The block is shifted by 'shiftwidth'. The RHS of the block is irrelevant. The
|
||||
The block is shifted by 'shiftwidth'. The RHS of the block is irrelevant. The
|
||||
LHS of the block determines the point from which to apply a right shift, and
|
||||
padding includes TABs optimally according to 'ts' and 'et'. The LHS of the
|
||||
padding includes TABs optimally according to 'ts' and 'et'. The LHS of the
|
||||
block determines the point upto which to shift left.
|
||||
Note: v_< padding is buggy if the Visual Block starts and ends in the same
|
||||
TAB. (Vim 5.4c).
|
||||
TAB. (Vim 5.4c)
|
||||
See |v_b_>_example|.
|
||||
See |v_b_<_example|.
|
||||
|
||||
@ -364,14 +367,14 @@ Note that special characters (like '.' and '*') will cause problems.
|
||||
|
||||
Visual-block Examples *blockwise-examples*
|
||||
With the following text, I will indicate the commands to produce the block and
|
||||
the results below. In all cases, the cursor begins on the 'a' in the first
|
||||
the results below. In all cases, the cursor begins on the 'a' in the first
|
||||
line of the test text.
|
||||
The following modeline settings are assumed ":ts=8:sw=4:".
|
||||
|
||||
It will be helpful to
|
||||
:set hls
|
||||
/<TAB>
|
||||
where <TAB> is a real TAB. This helps visualise the operations.
|
||||
where <TAB> is a real TAB. This helps visualise the operations.
|
||||
|
||||
The test text is:
|
||||
|
||||
|
395
runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1
Normal file
395
runtime/doc/xxd-fr.1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,395 @@
|
||||
.TH XXD 1 "août 1996" "Page de manuel pour xxd"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" 21st May 1996
|
||||
.\" Man page author:
|
||||
.\" Tony Nugent <tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
|
||||
.\" Changes by Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
|
||||
.\" French translation by David Blanchet <david.blanchet@free.fr> 2005-03
|
||||
.SH NOM
|
||||
.I xxd
|
||||
\- convertit en représentation hexadécimale et inversement.
|
||||
.SH SYNOPSIS
|
||||
.B xxd
|
||||
\-h[elp]
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B xxd
|
||||
[options] [fichier_entree [fichier_sortie]]
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.B xxd
|
||||
\-r[evert] [options] [fichier_entree [fichier_sortie]]
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.I xxd
|
||||
crée un fichier contenant la représentation hexadécimale d'un fichier
|
||||
binaire ou de l'entrée standard.
|
||||
Il peut également convertir un fichier de codes hexadécimaux en un fichier
|
||||
binaire.
|
||||
Comme
|
||||
.BR uuencode(1)
|
||||
et
|
||||
.BR uudecode(1)
|
||||
il permet la transmission de données binaires dans une représentation ASCII
|
||||
compatible avec le courrier électronique, mais a l'avantage de décoder la
|
||||
sortie standard.
|
||||
De plus, il peut être utilisé pour appliquer des rustines à des fichiers
|
||||
binaires.
|
||||
.SH OPTIONS
|
||||
Si aucun
|
||||
.I fichier_entree
|
||||
n'est spécifié, l'entrée standard est utilisée.
|
||||
Si
|
||||
.I fichier_entree
|
||||
correspond au caractère
|
||||
.RB '\-'
|
||||
\, l'entrée standard est employée comme source des données en entrée.
|
||||
Si aucun
|
||||
.I fichier_sortie
|
||||
n'est spécifié (ou qu'un caractère
|
||||
.RB '\-'
|
||||
est donné à sa place), le résultat est envoyé sur la sortie standard.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
NOTE : un analyseur paresseux est utilisé. Il ne vérifie pas au-delà de la
|
||||
première lettre de l'option, à moins que cette dernière ne requiert un
|
||||
paramètre.
|
||||
L'espace entre l'option et son paramètre est optionnel.
|
||||
Les paramètres des options peuvent être spécifiés en notation décimale,
|
||||
hexadécimale ou octale.
|
||||
Ainsi
|
||||
.BR \-c8 ,
|
||||
.BR "\-c 8" ,
|
||||
.B \-c 010
|
||||
et
|
||||
.B \-cols 8
|
||||
sont tous équivalents.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-a " | " \-autoskip
|
||||
active la fonctionnalité "autoskip" : le caractère '*' remplace les lignes
|
||||
d'octets nuls. Désactivée par défaut.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-b " | " \-bits
|
||||
Convertit en binaires plutôt qu'en hexadécimal.
|
||||
Cette option écrit les octets comme une séquence de "1" et de "0" au lieu
|
||||
d'une conversion en hexadécimal traditionnel. Chaque ligne est précédée par un
|
||||
numéro de ligne en hexadécimal et suivie de la représentation ASCII (ou
|
||||
EBCDIC) correspondante. Les options \-r, \-p, \-i ne fonctionnent pas dans ce
|
||||
mode.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
|
||||
place
|
||||
.RI < cols >
|
||||
octets par ligne. 16 par défaut (\-i : 12, \-ps : 30, \-b : 6). Maximum 256.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-E " | " \-EBCDIC
|
||||
Passe le codage des caractères de la colonne de droite de ASCII à EBCDIC.
|
||||
Cela ne change pas la représentation hexadécimale. Cette option est sans effet
|
||||
quand elle est utilisée avec \-r, \-p or \-i.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR "\-g octets " | " \-groupsize octets"
|
||||
Regroupe les octets (deux chiffres hexadécimaux ou huit chiffres binaires)
|
||||
par groupe de
|
||||
.RI < octets >
|
||||
\, séparés par des espaces blancs. Spécifiez
|
||||
.I \-g 0
|
||||
pour supprimer le regroupement.
|
||||
.RI < octets >
|
||||
vaut 2 par défaut dans le mode normal et \fI1\fP en
|
||||
représentation binaire. Le regroupement ne s'applique pas aux styles
|
||||
Postscript et Include.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-h " | " \-help
|
||||
Affiche un résumé des commandes disponibles et quitte. Aucune conversion n'est
|
||||
effectuée.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-i " | " \-include
|
||||
produit une sortie dans le style #include (fichier C à inclure). La définition
|
||||
complète d'un tableau statique est écrite et est nommée d'après le fichier
|
||||
d'origine, à moins que xxd lise depuis l'entrée standard.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR "\-l long " | " \-len long"
|
||||
Arrête après l'écriture de
|
||||
.RI < long >
|
||||
octets.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain
|
||||
Produit une conversion continue dans le style Postscript (postscript continuous
|
||||
hexdumd style).
|
||||
Également connu sous le nom de « conversion brute » (plain hexdump style).
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-r " | " \-revert
|
||||
Opération inverse : convertit un fichier hexadécimal en un fichier binaire (ou
|
||||
applique une rustine à un fichier binaire).
|
||||
Si l'écriture n'a pas lieu sur la sortie standard, xxd écrit dans le fichier
|
||||
qu'il produit sans le tronquer. Utilisez la combinaison
|
||||
.I \-r \-p
|
||||
pour lire de l'hexadécimal brut sans information sur le numéro des lignes et
|
||||
sans format de colonnes particulier. Des espaces blancs et coupures de lignes
|
||||
supplémentaires sont autorisés à n'importe quel endroit.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.I \-seek décalage
|
||||
Utilisé après l'option
|
||||
.I \-r
|
||||
\: inverse la conversion en ajoutant
|
||||
.RI < décalage >
|
||||
aux positions dans le fichier données dans le code hexadécimal.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.I \-s [\+][\-]décalage
|
||||
Débute au
|
||||
.RI < décalage >
|
||||
absolu ou relatif dans fichier_entree.
|
||||
\fI\+ \fRindique que le décalage est relatif à la position courante dans
|
||||
l'entrée standard (sans effet si la lecture n'a pas lieu sur l'entrée
|
||||
standard). \fI\- \fRindique un décalage en caractères depuis la fin de
|
||||
l'entrée (utilisé avec \fI \+ \fR, désigne la position avant la position
|
||||
actuelle de l'entrée standard).
|
||||
Sans l'option \-s, xxd démarre à la position courante du fichier.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.I \-u
|
||||
Utilise des chiffres hexadécimaux majuscules. La casse par défaut est
|
||||
minuscule.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.IR \-v " | " \-version
|
||||
Affiche la version de xxd.
|
||||
.SH MISE EN GARDE
|
||||
.I xxd \-r
|
||||
effectue des opérations internes un peu obscures lors de l'évaluation
|
||||
des informations sur les numéros de lignes. Si le fichier de sortie est
|
||||
adressable, alors les numéros de lignes au début de chaque ligne d'hexadécimal
|
||||
peuvent être désordonnées, des lignes peuvent manquer ou se chevaucher. Dans
|
||||
ces cas, xxd utilisera lseek(2) pour déterminer la prochaine position. Si le
|
||||
fichier n'est pas adressable, seuls les vides sont autorisés, et ils seront
|
||||
comblés par des octets nuls.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.I xxd \-r
|
||||
ne génère aucune erreur lors de l'analyse. Le problème sont passés
|
||||
silencieusement.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Lors de l'édition de la représentation hexadécimale, veuillez noter que
|
||||
.I xxd \-r
|
||||
ignore tout ce qui se trouve sur la ligne après avoir lu suffisamment de
|
||||
données hexadécimales (voir l'option \-c). Cela signifie également que les
|
||||
modifications dans la colonne ASCII (ou EBCDIC) sont toujours ignorées. La
|
||||
conversion inverse de données hexadécimales brutes (postscript) avec xxd \-r
|
||||
\-p ne dépend pas d'un nombre correct de colonnes. Dans ce cas, tout ce qui
|
||||
ressemble à une paire de chiffres hexadécimaux est interprété.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Remarquez la différence entre
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-i fichier\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
et
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-i \< fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.I xxd \-s \+seek
|
||||
peut différer de
|
||||
.I xxd \-s seek
|
||||
\, car lseek(2) est utilisé pour « revenir en arrière ». Le '+' fait une
|
||||
différence quand la source des données est l'entrée standard et si la position
|
||||
dans le fichier de l'entrée standard n'est pas au début du fichier lorsque xxd
|
||||
est démarré et qu'il reçoit ses données.
|
||||
L'exemple suivant peut vous aider à comprendre (ou bien vous perdre davantage
|
||||
encore !)...
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Remettre l'entrée standard au départ avant de lire ; nécessaire car 'cat' a
|
||||
déjà lu jusqu'à la fin de l'entrée standard.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% sh \-c 'cat > donnees_binaires; xxd \-s 0 > donnees_hexa' < fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Convertir à partir de la position 0x480 (= 1024 + 128) du fichier.
|
||||
Le symbole '+' signifie "relativement à la position actuelle', ainsi 128 est
|
||||
ajouté aux 1024 octets comptabilisés pour dd.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=donnees_binaires bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 >
|
||||
donnees_hexa' < fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Convertir de fichier depuis la position 0x100 (= 1024 - 768) du fichier.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=donnees_binaires bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +\-768 >
|
||||
donnees_hexa' < fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Toutefois, cette situation est peu fréquente et l'utilisation de '+' est
|
||||
rarement requise. L'auteur préfère surveiller les effets de xxd avec strace(1)
|
||||
ou truss(1) quand \-s est employé.
|
||||
.SH EXEMPLES
|
||||
Afficher la totalité du
|
||||
.B fichier
|
||||
sauf les trois premières lignes (0x30 octets en hexadécimal).
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
afficher les trois dernières lignes (0x30 octets en hexadécimal) du
|
||||
.B fichier
|
||||
\.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Afficher 120 octets convertis en continu, avec 20 octets par ligne.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-ps \-c 20 xxd\-fr.1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
2e54482058584420312022616ffb742031393936
|
||||
.br
|
||||
22202250616765206465206d616e75656c20706f
|
||||
.br
|
||||
757220787864220a2e5c220a2e5c222032317374
|
||||
.br
|
||||
204d617920313939360a2e5c22204d616e207061
|
||||
.br
|
||||
676520617574686f723a0a2e5c2220202020546f
|
||||
.br
|
||||
6e79204e7567656e74203c746f6e79407363746e
|
||||
.br
|
||||
204e7567656e74203c746f6e79407363746e7567
|
||||
.br
|
||||
2e54482058584420312022417567757374203139
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Convertir les 120 premiers octets de cette page de manuel avec 12 octets par
|
||||
ligne.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-c 12 xxd\-fr.1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 2261 .TH XXD 1 "a
|
||||
.br
|
||||
000000c: 6ffb 7420 3139 3936 2220 2250 o.t 1996" "P
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000018: 6167 6520 6465 206d 616e 7565 age de manue
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000024: 6c20 706f 7572 2078 7864 220a l pour xxd".
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000030: 2e5c 220a 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 .\"..\" 21st
|
||||
.br
|
||||
000003c: 204d 6179 2031 3939 360a 2e5c May 1996..\
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000048: 2220 4d61 6e20 7061 6765 2061 " Man page a
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000054: 7574 686f 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 uthor:..\"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000060: 2020 546f 6e79 204e 7567 656e Tony Nugen
|
||||
.br
|
||||
000006c: 7420 3c74 6f6e 7940 7363 746e t <tony@sctn
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Afficher la date écrite au début du fichier xxd\-fr.1.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-s 0x38 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd.1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000036: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939 36 21st May 1996
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Copier
|
||||
.B fichier_entree
|
||||
vers
|
||||
.B fichier_sortie
|
||||
en ajoutant 100 octets de valeur 0x00 avant.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd fichier_entree | xxd \-r \-s 100 \> fichier_sortie\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Patcher la date dans le fichier xxd.1
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% echo '0000037: 3574 68' | xxd \-r \- xxd\-fr.1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-s 0x38 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd\-fr.1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000036: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 36 25th May 1996
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Créer un fichier de 65537 octets tous nuls (0x00),
|
||||
sauf le dernier qui vaut 'A' (0x41 en hexadécimal).
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \> fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Convertir le fichier de l'exemple précédent avec la fonctionnalité "autoskip".
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-a \-c 12 fichier\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
0000000: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ............
|
||||
.br
|
||||
*
|
||||
.br
|
||||
000fffc: 0000 0000 40 ....A
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Créer un fichier d'un octet, contenant seulement le caractère 'A'.
|
||||
Les nombres après '\-r \-s' s'ajoutent au numéros de lignes trouvées dans le
|
||||
fichier ; XXX in effects, les octets initiaux sont supprimés.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \-s \-0x10000 \> fichier\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Utiliser xxd comme filtre dans un éditeur tel que
|
||||
.B vim(1)
|
||||
pour convertir une zone comprise entre les marques 'a' et 'z'.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI:'a,'z!xxd\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Utiliser xxd comme filtre dans un éditeur tel que
|
||||
.B vim(1)
|
||||
pour récupérer une conversion binaire comprise entre les marques 'a' et 'z'.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI:'a,'z!xxd \-r\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Utiliser xxd comme filtre dans un éditeur tel que
|
||||
.B vim(1)
|
||||
pour récupérer une ligne convertie. Placez le curseur sur la ligne et tapez :
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI!!xxd \-r\fR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Lire des caractères depuis une connexion série :
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% xxd \-c1 < /dev/term/b &\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% stty < /dev/term/b \-echo \-opost \-isig \-icanon min 1\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI% echo \-n foo > /dev/term/b\fR
|
||||
.SH VALEURS DE RETOUR
|
||||
Les erreurs suivantes sont rapportées :
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
0
|
||||
aucune erreur ne s'est produit.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\-1
|
||||
opération non supportée (
|
||||
.I xxd \-r \-i
|
||||
reste impossible).
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
1
|
||||
erreur lors de l'analyse des options.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
2
|
||||
problème avec le fichier d'entrée.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
3
|
||||
problème avec le fichier de sortie.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
4, 5
|
||||
la position spécifiée n'est pas atteignable.
|
||||
.SH VOIR AUSSI
|
||||
uuencode(1), uudecode(1), patch(1)
|
||||
.SH AVERTISSEMENTS
|
||||
L'étrangeté de cet outil reflète celle du cerveau de ses créateurs.
|
||||
Utilisez cet outil à vos risques et périls. Dupliquez vos fichiers.
|
||||
Surveillez l'outil. Devenez un gourou.
|
||||
.SH VERSION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel documente la version 1.7 de xxd.
|
||||
.SH AUTEUR
|
||||
(c) 1990-1997 par Juergen Weigert
|
||||
.br
|
||||
<jnweiger@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
"Distribute freely and credit me,
|
||||
.br
|
||||
make money and share with me,
|
||||
.br
|
||||
lose money and don't ask me."
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Distribution libre en citant l'auteur,
|
||||
.br
|
||||
gagnez de l'argent, pensez à moi,
|
||||
.br
|
||||
perdez de l'argent, oubliez-moi.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Page de manuel débutée par Tony Nugent
|
||||
.br
|
||||
<tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Modifications mineures par Bram Moolenaar.
|
||||
Édité par Juergen Weigert.
|
||||
.SH TRADUCTION
|
||||
Cette page de manuel a été traduite par David Blanchet
|
||||
<david.blanchet@free.fr> 2004-12-24.
|
935
runtime/spell/README.txt
Normal file
935
runtime/spell/README.txt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,935 @@
|
||||
The spell files included here are in Vim's special format. You can't edit
|
||||
them. See ":help spell" for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright
|
||||
|
||||
The files used as input for the spell files come from the OpenOffice.org spell
|
||||
files. Most of them go under the LGPL or a similar license.
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright notices for specific languages follow. Note that the files for
|
||||
different regions are merged, both to save space and to make it possible to
|
||||
highlight words for another region different from bad words.
|
||||
|
||||
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
|
||||
en_US
|
||||
|
||||
20040623 release.
|
||||
--
|
||||
This dictionary is based on a subset of the original
|
||||
English wordlist created by Kevin Atkinson for Pspell
|
||||
and Aspell and thus is covered by his original
|
||||
LGPL license. The affix file is a heavily modified
|
||||
version of the original english.aff file which was
|
||||
released as part of Geoff Kuenning's Ispell and as
|
||||
such is covered by his BSD license.
|
||||
|
||||
Thanks to both authors for there wonderful work.
|
||||
|
||||
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
|
||||
en_AU
|
||||
|
||||
This dictionary was based on the en_GB Myspell dictionary
|
||||
which in turn was initially based on a subset of the
|
||||
original English wordlist created by Kevin Atkinson for
|
||||
Pspell and Aspell and thus is covered by his original
|
||||
LGPL licence.
|
||||
|
||||
The credit for this en_AU dictionary goes to:
|
||||
|
||||
Kelvin Eldridge (maintainer)
|
||||
Jean Hollis Weber
|
||||
David Wilson
|
||||
|
||||
- Words incorrect in Australian English removed
|
||||
- a list from the previously removed words with corrected spelling was added
|
||||
- a list of major rivers was added
|
||||
- a list of place names was added
|
||||
- a list of Australian mammals was added
|
||||
- a list of Aboriginal/Koori words commonly used was added
|
||||
|
||||
A total of 119,267 words are now recognized
|
||||
by the dictionary.
|
||||
|
||||
Of course, special thanks go to the editors of the
|
||||
en_GB dictionary (David Bartlett, Brian Kelk and
|
||||
Andrew Brown) which provided the starting point
|
||||
for this dictionary.
|
||||
|
||||
The affix file is currently a duplicate of the en_AU.aff
|
||||
created completely from scratch by David Bartlett and
|
||||
Andrew Brown, based on the published
|
||||
rules for MySpell and is also provided under the LGPL.
|
||||
|
||||
If you find omissions or bugs or have new words to
|
||||
add to the dictionary, please contact the en_AU
|
||||
maintainer at:
|
||||
|
||||
"Kelvin" <audictionary@onlineconnections.com.au>
|
||||
|
||||
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
|
||||
en_CA
|
||||
|
||||
The dictionary file was created using the "final" English and Canadian SCOWL
|
||||
(Spell Checker Oriented Word Lists) wordlists available at Kevin's Word Lists
|
||||
Page (http://wordlist.sourceforge.net). Lists with the suffixes 10, 20, 35,
|
||||
50, 65 and 65 were used. Lists with the suffixes 70, 80 and 95 were excluded.
|
||||
Copyright information for SCOWL and the wordlists used in creating it is
|
||||
reproduced below.
|
||||
|
||||
The affix file is identical to the MySpell English (United States) affix file.
|
||||
It is a heavily modified version of the original english.aff file which was
|
||||
released as part of Geoff Kuenning's Ispell and as such is covered by his BSD
|
||||
license.
|
||||
|
||||
---
|
||||
|
||||
COPYRIGHT, SOURCES, and CREDITS from SCOWL readme file:
|
||||
|
||||
The collective work is Copyright 2000 by Kevin Atkinson as well as any
|
||||
of the copyrights mentioned below:
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000 by Kevin Atkinson
|
||||
|
||||
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell these word
|
||||
lists, the associated scripts, the output created from the scripts,
|
||||
and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
|
||||
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
|
||||
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
|
||||
supporting documentation. Kevin Atkinson makes no representations
|
||||
about the suitability of this array for any purpose. It is provided
|
||||
"as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
|
||||
Alan Beale <biljir@pobox.com> also deserves special credit as he has,
|
||||
in addition to providing the 12Dicts package and being a major
|
||||
contributor to the ENABLE word list, given me an incredible amount of
|
||||
feedback and created a number of special lists (those found in the
|
||||
Supplement) in order to help improve the overall quality of SCOWL.
|
||||
|
||||
The 10 level includes the 1000 most common English words (according to
|
||||
the Moby (TM) Words II [MWords] package), a subset of the 1000 most
|
||||
common words on the Internet (again, according to Moby Words II), and
|
||||
frequently class 16 from Brian Kelk's "UK English Wordlist
|
||||
with Frequency Classification".
|
||||
|
||||
The MWords package was explicitly placed in the public domain:
|
||||
|
||||
The Moby lexicon project is complete and has
|
||||
been place into the public domain. Use, sell,
|
||||
rework, excerpt and use in any way on any platform.
|
||||
|
||||
Placing this material on internal or public servers is
|
||||
also encouraged. The compiler is not aware of any
|
||||
export restrictions so freely distribute world-wide.
|
||||
|
||||
You can verify the public domain status by contacting
|
||||
|
||||
Grady Ward
|
||||
3449 Martha Ct.
|
||||
Arcata, CA 95521-4884
|
||||
|
||||
grady@netcom.com
|
||||
grady@northcoast.com
|
||||
|
||||
The "UK English Wordlist With Frequency Classification" is also in the
|
||||
Public Domain:
|
||||
|
||||
Date: Sat, 08 Jul 2000 20:27:21 +0100
|
||||
From: Brian Kelk <Brian.Kelk@cl.cam.ac.uk>
|
||||
|
||||
> I was wondering what the copyright status of your "UK English
|
||||
> Wordlist With Frequency Classification" word list as it seems to
|
||||
> be lacking any copyright notice.
|
||||
|
||||
There were many many sources in total, but any text marked
|
||||
"copyright" was avoided. Locally-written documentation was one
|
||||
source. An earlier version of the list resided in a filespace called
|
||||
PUBLIC on the University mainframe, because it was considered public
|
||||
domain.
|
||||
|
||||
Date: Tue, 11 Jul 2000 19:31:34 +0100
|
||||
|
||||
> So are you saying your word list is also in the public domain?
|
||||
|
||||
That is the intention.
|
||||
|
||||
The 20 level includes frequency classes 7-15 from Brian's word list.
|
||||
|
||||
The 35 level includes frequency classes 2-6 and words appearing in at
|
||||
least 11 of 12 dictionaries as indicated in the 12Dicts package. All
|
||||
words from the 12Dicts package have had likely inflections added via
|
||||
my inflection database.
|
||||
|
||||
The 12Dicts package and Supplement is in the Public Domain.
|
||||
|
||||
The WordNet database, which was used in the creation of the
|
||||
Inflections database, is under the following copyright:
|
||||
|
||||
This software and database is being provided to you, the LICENSEE,
|
||||
by Princeton University under the following license. By obtaining,
|
||||
using and/or copying this software and database, you agree that you
|
||||
have read, understood, and will comply with these terms and
|
||||
conditions.:
|
||||
|
||||
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and
|
||||
database and its documentation for any purpose and without fee or
|
||||
royalty is hereby granted, provided that you agree to comply with
|
||||
the following copyright notice and statements, including the
|
||||
disclaimer, and that the same appear on ALL copies of the software,
|
||||
database and documentation, including modifications that you make
|
||||
for internal use or for distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
WordNet 1.6 Copyright 1997 by Princeton University. All rights
|
||||
reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
THIS SOFTWARE AND DATABASE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND PRINCETON
|
||||
UNIVERSITY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
|
||||
IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, PRINCETON
|
||||
UNIVERSITY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
|
||||
ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE
|
||||
LICENSED SOFTWARE, DATABASE OR DOCUMENTATION WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY
|
||||
THIRD PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS OR OTHER RIGHTS.
|
||||
|
||||
The name of Princeton University or Princeton may not be used in
|
||||
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
|
||||
and/or database. Title to copyright in this software, database and
|
||||
any associated documentation shall at all times remain with
|
||||
Princeton University and LICENSEE agrees to preserve same.
|
||||
|
||||
The 50 level includes Brian's frequency class 1, words words appearing
|
||||
in at least 5 of 12 of the dictionaries as indicated in the 12Dicts
|
||||
package, and uppercase words in at least 4 of the previous 12
|
||||
dictionaries. A decent number of proper names is also included: The
|
||||
top 1000 male, female, and Last names from the 1990 Census report; a
|
||||
list of names sent to me by Alan Beale; and a few names that I added
|
||||
myself. Finally a small list of abbreviations not commonly found in
|
||||
other word lists is included.
|
||||
|
||||
The name files form the Census report is a government document which I
|
||||
don't think can be copyrighted.
|
||||
|
||||
The name list from Alan Beale is also derived from the linux words
|
||||
list, which is derived from the DEC list. He also added a bunch of
|
||||
miscellaneous names to the list, which he released to the Public Domain.
|
||||
|
||||
The DEC Word list doesn't have a formal name. It is labeled as "FILE:
|
||||
english.words; VERSION: DEC-SRC-92-04-05" and was put together by Jorge
|
||||
Stolfi <stolfi@src.dec.com> DEC Systems Research Center. The DEC Word
|
||||
list has the following copyright statement:
|
||||
|
||||
(NON-)COPYRIGHT STATUS
|
||||
|
||||
To the best of my knowledge, all the files I used to build these
|
||||
wordlists were available for public distribution and use, at least
|
||||
for non-commercial purposes. I have confirmed this assumption with
|
||||
the authors of the lists, whenever they were known.
|
||||
|
||||
Therefore, it is safe to assume that the wordlists in this package
|
||||
can also be freely copied, distributed, modified, and used for
|
||||
personal, educational, and research purposes. (Use of these files in
|
||||
commercial products may require written permission from DEC and/or
|
||||
the authors of the original lists.)
|
||||
|
||||
Whenever you distribute any of these wordlists, please distribute
|
||||
also the accompanying README file. If you distribute a modified
|
||||
copy of one of these wordlists, please include the original README
|
||||
file with a note explaining your modifications. Your users will
|
||||
surely appreciate that.
|
||||
|
||||
(NO-)WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
|
||||
|
||||
These files, like the original wordlists on which they are based,
|
||||
are still very incomplete, uneven, and inconsitent, and probably
|
||||
contain many errors. They are offered "as is" without any warranty
|
||||
of correctness or fitness for any particular purpose. Neither I nor
|
||||
my employer can be held responsible for any losses or damages that
|
||||
may result from their use.
|
||||
|
||||
However since this Word List is used in the linux.words package which
|
||||
the author claims is free of any copyright I assume it is OK to use
|
||||
for most purposes. If you want to use this in a commercial project
|
||||
and this concerns you the information from the DEC word list can
|
||||
easily be removed without much sacrifice in quality as only the name
|
||||
lists were used.
|
||||
|
||||
The file special-jargon.50 uses common.lst and word.lst from the
|
||||
"Unofficial Jargon File Word Lists" which is derived from "The Jargon
|
||||
File". All of which is in the Public Domain. This file also contain
|
||||
a few extra UNIX terms which are found in the file "unix-terms" in the
|
||||
special/ directory.
|
||||
|
||||
The 60 level includes Brian's frequency class 0 and all words
|
||||
appearing in at least 2 of the 12 dictionaries as indicated by the
|
||||
12Dicts package. A large number of names are also included: The 4,946
|
||||
female names and 3,897 male names from the MWords package and the
|
||||
files "computer.names", "misc.names", and "org.names" from the DEC
|
||||
package.
|
||||
|
||||
The 65 level includes words found in the Ispell "medium" word list.
|
||||
The Ispell word lists are under the same copyright of Ispell itself
|
||||
which is:
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 1993, Geoff Kuenning, Granada Hills, CA
|
||||
All rights reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
|
||||
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
|
||||
are met:
|
||||
|
||||
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
|
||||
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
|
||||
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
|
||||
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
|
||||
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
|
||||
3. All modifications to the source code must be clearly marked as
|
||||
such. Binary redistributions based on modified source code
|
||||
must be clearly marked as modified versions in the documentation
|
||||
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
|
||||
4. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
|
||||
must display the following acknowledgment:
|
||||
This product includes software developed by Geoff Kuenning and
|
||||
other unpaid contributors.
|
||||
5. The name of Geoff Kuenning may not be used to endorse or promote
|
||||
products derived from this software without specific prior
|
||||
written permission.
|
||||
|
||||
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY GEOFF KUENNING AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
|
||||
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
|
||||
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
|
||||
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEOFF
|
||||
KUENNING OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
|
||||
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
|
||||
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
|
||||
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
|
||||
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
|
||||
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
|
||||
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
|
||||
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
|
||||
|
||||
The 70 level includes the 74,550 common dictionary words and the 21,986 names
|
||||
list from the MWords package. The common dictionary words, like those
|
||||
from the 12Dicts package, have had all likely inflections added.
|
||||
|
||||
The 80 level includes the ENABLE word list, all the lists in the
|
||||
ENABLE supplement package (except for ABLE), the "UK Advanced Cryptics
|
||||
Dictionary" (UKACD), the list of signature words in from YAWL package,
|
||||
and the 10,196 places list from the MWords package.
|
||||
|
||||
The ENABLE package, mainted by M\Cooper <thegrendel@theriver.com>,
|
||||
is in the Public Domain:
|
||||
|
||||
The ENABLE master word list, WORD.LST, is herewith formally released
|
||||
into the Public Domain. Anyone is free to use it or distribute it in
|
||||
any manner they see fit. No fee or registration is required for its
|
||||
use nor are "contributions" solicited (if you feel you absolutely
|
||||
must contribute something for your own peace of mind, the authors of
|
||||
the ENABLE list ask that you make a donation on their behalf to your
|
||||
favorite charity). This word list is our gift to the Scrabble
|
||||
community, as an alternate to "official" word lists. Game designers
|
||||
may feel free to incorporate the WORD.LST into their games. Please
|
||||
mention the source and credit us as originators of the list. Note
|
||||
that if you, as a game designer, use the WORD.LST in your product,
|
||||
you may still copyright and protect your product, but you may *not*
|
||||
legally copyright or in any way restrict redistribution of the
|
||||
WORD.LST portion of your product. This *may* under law restrict your
|
||||
rights to restrict your users' rights, but that is only fair.
|
||||
|
||||
UKACD, by J Ross Beresford <ross@bryson.demon.co.uk>, is under the
|
||||
following copyright:
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright (c) J Ross Beresford 1993-1999. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
The following restriction is placed on the use of this publication:
|
||||
if The UK Advanced Cryptics Dictionary is used in a software package
|
||||
or redistributed in any form, the copyright notice must be
|
||||
prominently displayed and the text of this document must be included
|
||||
verbatim.
|
||||
|
||||
There are no other restrictions: I would like to see the list
|
||||
distributed as widely as possible.
|
||||
|
||||
The 95 level includes the 354,984 single words and 256,772 compound
|
||||
words from the MWords package, ABLE.LST from the ENABLE Supplement,
|
||||
and some additional words found in my part-of-speech database that
|
||||
were not found anywhere else.
|
||||
|
||||
Accent information was taken from UKACD.
|
||||
|
||||
My VARCON package was used to create the American, British, and
|
||||
Canadian word list.
|
||||
|
||||
Since the original word lists used used in the
|
||||
VARCON package came from the Ispell distribution they are under the
|
||||
Ispell copyright.
|
||||
|
||||
The variant word lists were created from a list of variants found in
|
||||
the 12dicts supplement package as well as a list of variants I created
|
||||
myself.
|
||||
|
||||
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
|
||||
en_GB
|
||||
|
||||
This dictionary was initially based on a subset of the
|
||||
original English wordlist created by Kevin Atkinson for
|
||||
Pspell and Aspell and thus is covered by his original
|
||||
LGPL licence.
|
||||
|
||||
It has been extensively updated by David Bartlett, Brian Kelk
|
||||
and Andrew Brown:
|
||||
- numerous Americanism have been removed
|
||||
- numerous American spellings have been corrected
|
||||
- missing words have been added
|
||||
- many errors have been corrected
|
||||
- compound hyphenated words have been added where appropriate
|
||||
|
||||
Valuable inputs to this process were received from many other
|
||||
people - far too numerous to name. Serious thanks to you all
|
||||
for your greatly appreciated help.
|
||||
|
||||
This word list is intended to be a good representation of
|
||||
current modern British English and thus it should be a good
|
||||
basis for Commonwealth English in most countries of the world
|
||||
outside North America.
|
||||
|
||||
The affix file has been created completely from scratch
|
||||
by David Bartlett and Andrew Brown, based on the published
|
||||
rules for MySpell and is also provided under the LGPL.
|
||||
|
||||
In creating the affix rules an attempt has been made to
|
||||
reproduce the most general rules for English word
|
||||
formation, rather than merely use it as a means to
|
||||
compress the size of the dictionary. It is hoped that this
|
||||
will facilitate future localisation to other variants of
|
||||
English.
|
||||
|
||||
Please let David Bartlett <dbartlett@iee.org> know of any
|
||||
errors that you find.
|
||||
|
||||
The current release is R 1.14, 15/12/02 or later
|
||||
|
||||
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
|
||||
en_NZ
|
||||
|
||||
I. Copyright
|
||||
II. Copying (Licence)
|
||||
----------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
I. Copyright
|
||||
|
||||
NZ English Dictionary v0.9 beta - Build 06SEP03
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
NB This is an initial version, please check:
|
||||
http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/download_dictionary.html
|
||||
or
|
||||
http://www.girlza.com/dictionary/download.html
|
||||
for a final version, after a little while (no hurry).
|
||||
|
||||
This dictionary is based on the en_GB Myspell dictionary
|
||||
which in turn was initially based on a subset of the
|
||||
original English wordlist created by Kevin Atkinson for
|
||||
Pspell and Aspell and thus is covered by his original
|
||||
LGPL licence.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
en_NZ.dic has been altered to include New Zealand places,
|
||||
including major cities and towns, and major suburbs. It
|
||||
also contains NZ words, organisations and expressions.
|
||||
|
||||
en_NZ.aff has had a few REPlace strings added, but is
|
||||
basically unchanged.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Acknowledgements
|
||||
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
|
||||
Thanks must go to the original creators of the British
|
||||
dictionary, David Bartlett, Brian Kelk and Andrew Brown.
|
||||
|
||||
I wouldn't have started this without seeing the Australian
|
||||
dictionary, thanks Kelvin Eldridge, Jean Hollis Weber and
|
||||
David Wilson.
|
||||
|
||||
And thank you to all who've contributed to OpenOffice.org.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
License
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
This dictionary is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public
|
||||
License, viewable at http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Issues
|
||||
~~~~~~
|
||||
Many of the proper nouns already in the dictionary do not have
|
||||
an affix for 's.
|
||||
All my new words start after the z's of the original dictionary.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Contact
|
||||
~~~~~~~
|
||||
Contact Tristan Burtenshaw (hooty@slingshot.co.nz) with any words,
|
||||
places or other suggestions for the dictionary.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
II. Copying
|
||||
|
||||
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
|
||||
Version 2.1, February 1999
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
||||
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
|
||||
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
||||
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
|
||||
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
|
||||
the version number 2.1.]
|
||||
|
||||
Preamble
|
||||
|
||||
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
|
||||
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
|
||||
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
|
||||
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
|
||||
|
||||
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
|
||||
specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the
|
||||
Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You
|
||||
can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether
|
||||
this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better
|
||||
strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
|
||||
|
||||
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,
|
||||
not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
|
||||
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
|
||||
for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
|
||||
it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
|
||||
it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do
|
||||
these things.
|
||||
|
||||
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
|
||||
distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
|
||||
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
|
||||
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
|
||||
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
|
||||
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
|
||||
code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide
|
||||
complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
|
||||
with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
|
||||
it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
|
||||
|
||||
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
|
||||
library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
|
||||
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
|
||||
|
||||
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
|
||||
there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
|
||||
modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
|
||||
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original
|
||||
author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
|
||||
introduced by others.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of
|
||||
any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
|
||||
effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
|
||||
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that
|
||||
any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
|
||||
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
|
||||
|
||||
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
|
||||
ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser
|
||||
General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and
|
||||
is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
|
||||
this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
|
||||
libraries into non-free programs.
|
||||
|
||||
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using
|
||||
a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
|
||||
combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
|
||||
General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
|
||||
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
|
||||
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with
|
||||
the library.
|
||||
|
||||
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it
|
||||
does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General
|
||||
Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
|
||||
of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages
|
||||
are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
|
||||
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
|
||||
special circumstances.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
|
||||
encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes
|
||||
a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
|
||||
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
|
||||
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
|
||||
case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
|
||||
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
|
||||
programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
|
||||
free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
|
||||
non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
|
||||
operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
|
||||
system.
|
||||
|
||||
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
|
||||
users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is
|
||||
linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run
|
||||
that program using a modified version of the Library.
|
||||
|
||||
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
|
||||
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
|
||||
"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
|
||||
former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
|
||||
be combined with the library in order to run.
|
||||
|
||||
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
|
||||
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
|
||||
|
||||
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
|
||||
program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
|
||||
other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
|
||||
this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
|
||||
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
|
||||
|
||||
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
|
||||
prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
|
||||
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
|
||||
which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
|
||||
Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
|
||||
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
|
||||
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
|
||||
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
|
||||
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
|
||||
|
||||
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
|
||||
making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
|
||||
all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
|
||||
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
|
||||
and installation of the library.
|
||||
|
||||
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
|
||||
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
|
||||
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
|
||||
such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
|
||||
on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
|
||||
writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
|
||||
and what the program that uses the Library does.
|
||||
|
||||
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
|
||||
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
|
||||
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
|
||||
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
|
||||
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
|
||||
warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
|
||||
Library.
|
||||
|
||||
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
|
||||
and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
|
||||
fee.
|
||||
|
||||
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
|
||||
of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
|
||||
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
|
||||
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
|
||||
|
||||
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
|
||||
|
||||
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
|
||||
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
|
||||
|
||||
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
|
||||
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
|
||||
table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
|
||||
the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
|
||||
is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
|
||||
in the event an application does not supply such function or
|
||||
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
|
||||
its purpose remains meaningful.
|
||||
|
||||
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
|
||||
a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
|
||||
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
|
||||
application-supplied function or table used by this function must
|
||||
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
|
||||
root function must still compute square roots.)
|
||||
|
||||
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
|
||||
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
|
||||
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
|
||||
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
|
||||
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
|
||||
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
|
||||
on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
|
||||
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
|
||||
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
|
||||
it.
|
||||
|
||||
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
|
||||
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
|
||||
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
|
||||
collective works based on the Library.
|
||||
|
||||
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
|
||||
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
|
||||
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
|
||||
the scope of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
|
||||
License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
|
||||
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
|
||||
that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
|
||||
instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
|
||||
ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
|
||||
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
|
||||
these notices.
|
||||
|
||||
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
|
||||
that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
|
||||
subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
|
||||
the Library into a program that is not a library.
|
||||
|
||||
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
|
||||
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
|
||||
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
|
||||
it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
|
||||
must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
|
||||
medium customarily used for software interchange.
|
||||
|
||||
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
|
||||
from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
|
||||
source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
|
||||
distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
|
||||
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
|
||||
|
||||
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
|
||||
Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
|
||||
linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
|
||||
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
|
||||
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
|
||||
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
|
||||
contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
|
||||
library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
|
||||
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
|
||||
|
||||
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
|
||||
that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
|
||||
derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
|
||||
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
|
||||
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
|
||||
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
|
||||
|
||||
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
|
||||
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
|
||||
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
|
||||
file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
|
||||
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
|
||||
Library will still fall under Section 6.)
|
||||
|
||||
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
|
||||
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
|
||||
Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
|
||||
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
|
||||
|
||||
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or
|
||||
link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
|
||||
work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
|
||||
under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
|
||||
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
|
||||
engineering for debugging such modifications.
|
||||
|
||||
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
|
||||
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
|
||||
this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
|
||||
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
|
||||
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
|
||||
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
|
||||
of these things:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
|
||||
machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
|
||||
changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
|
||||
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
|
||||
with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
|
||||
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
|
||||
user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
|
||||
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
|
||||
that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
|
||||
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
|
||||
to use the modified definitions.)
|
||||
|
||||
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
|
||||
Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
|
||||
copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
|
||||
rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2)
|
||||
will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if
|
||||
the user installs one, as long as the modified version is
|
||||
interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
|
||||
|
||||
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
|
||||
least three years, to give the same user the materials
|
||||
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
|
||||
than the cost of performing this distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
|
||||
from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
|
||||
specified materials from the same place.
|
||||
|
||||
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
|
||||
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
|
||||
|
||||
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
|
||||
Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
|
||||
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
|
||||
the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
|
||||
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
|
||||
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
|
||||
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
|
||||
the executable.
|
||||
|
||||
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
|
||||
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
|
||||
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
|
||||
use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
|
||||
distribute.
|
||||
|
||||
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
|
||||
Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
|
||||
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
|
||||
library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
|
||||
the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
|
||||
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
|
||||
based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
|
||||
facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
|
||||
Sections above.
|
||||
|
||||
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
|
||||
that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
|
||||
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
|
||||
|
||||
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
|
||||
the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
|
||||
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
|
||||
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
|
||||
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
|
||||
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
|
||||
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
|
||||
|
||||
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
|
||||
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
|
||||
distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
|
||||
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
|
||||
modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
|
||||
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
|
||||
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
|
||||
the Library or works based on it.
|
||||
|
||||
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
|
||||
Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
|
||||
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
|
||||
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
|
||||
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
|
||||
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with
|
||||
this License.
|
||||
|
||||
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
|
||||
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
|
||||
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
|
||||
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
|
||||
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
|
||||
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
|
||||
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
|
||||
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
|
||||
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
|
||||
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
|
||||
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
|
||||
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
|
||||
|
||||
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
|
||||
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
|
||||
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
|
||||
|
||||
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
|
||||
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
|
||||
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
|
||||
integrity of the free software distribution system which is
|
||||
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
|
||||
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
|
||||
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
|
||||
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
|
||||
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
|
||||
impose that choice.
|
||||
|
||||
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
|
||||
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
|
||||
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
|
||||
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
|
||||
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
|
||||
so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
|
||||
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
|
||||
written in the body of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
|
||||
versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
|
||||
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
|
||||
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
|
||||
|
||||
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
|
||||
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
|
||||
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
|
||||
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
|
||||
the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
|
||||
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
|
||||
the Free Software Foundation.
|
||||
|
||||
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
|
||||
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
|
||||
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
|
||||
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
|
||||
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
|
||||
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
|
||||
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
|
||||
and reuse of software generally.
|
||||
|
||||
NO WARRANTY
|
||||
|
||||
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
|
||||
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
|
||||
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
|
||||
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
|
||||
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
|
||||
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
|
||||
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
|
||||
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
|
||||
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
|
||||
|
||||
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
|
||||
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
|
||||
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
|
||||
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
|
||||
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
|
||||
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
|
||||
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
|
||||
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
|
||||
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
|
||||
DAMAGES.
|
||||
|
||||
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
|
BIN
runtime/spell/en.utf-8.spl
Normal file
BIN
runtime/spell/en.utf-8.spl
Normal file
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
||||
" Vim syntax file
|
||||
" Language: C#
|
||||
" Maintainer: Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
|
||||
" Last Change: Tue, 09 Mar 2004 14:32:13 CET
|
||||
" Last Change: Mi, 13 Apr 2005 22:52:57 CEST
|
||||
" Filenames: *.cs
|
||||
" $Id$
|
||||
"
|
||||
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ syn match csSpecialChar contained +\\["\\'0abfnrtvx]+
|
||||
" unicode characters
|
||||
syn match csUnicodeNumber +\\\(u\x\{4}\|U\x\{8}\)+ contained contains=csUnicodeSpecifier
|
||||
syn match csUnicodeSpecifier +\\[uU]+ contained
|
||||
syn region csVerbatimString start=+@"+ end=+"+ end=+$+ contains=csVerbatimSpec
|
||||
syn region csVerbatimString start=+@"+ end=+"+ end=+$+ skip=+""+ contains=csVerbatimSpec
|
||||
syn match csVerbatimSpec +@"+he=s+1 contained
|
||||
syn region csString start=+"+ end=+"+ end=+$+ contains=csSpecialChar,csSpecialError,csUnicodeNumber
|
||||
syn match csCharacter "'[^']*'" contains=csSpecialChar,csSpecialCharError
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
" Maintainer: Kazunobu Kuriyama <kazunobu.kuriyama@nifty.com>
|
||||
" Ex-maintainer: Anthony Hodsdon <ahodsdon@fastmail.fm>
|
||||
" First Author: Valentino Kyriakides <1kyriaki@informatik.uni-hamburg.de>
|
||||
" Last Change: 2004 May 20
|
||||
" Last Change: 2005 Apr 13
|
||||
|
||||
" For version 5.x: Clear all syntax items
|
||||
" For version 6.x: Quit when a syntax file was already loaded
|
||||
@ -30,8 +30,9 @@ endif
|
||||
|
||||
" ObjC keywords, types, type qualifiers etc.
|
||||
syn keyword objcStatement self super _cmd
|
||||
syn keyword objcType id Class SEL IMP BOOL nil Nil
|
||||
syn keyword objcType id Class SEL IMP BOOL
|
||||
syn keyword objcTypeModifier bycopy in out inout oneway
|
||||
syn keyword objcConstant nil Nil
|
||||
|
||||
" Match the ObjC #import directive (like C's #include)
|
||||
syn region objcImported display contained start=+"+ skip=+\\\\\|\\"+ end=+"+
|
||||
@ -98,6 +99,7 @@ if version >= 508 || !exists("did_objc_syntax_inits")
|
||||
HiLink objcString cString
|
||||
HiLink objcSpecial Special
|
||||
HiLink objcProtocol None
|
||||
HiLink objcConstant cConstant
|
||||
|
||||
delcommand HiLink
|
||||
endif
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
" Maintainer: Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
|
||||
" Author and previous maintainer:
|
||||
" Paul Siegmann <pauls@euronet.nl>
|
||||
" Last Change: Fri, 04 Jun 2004 10:41:54 CEST
|
||||
" Last Change: Mi, 13 Apr 2005 22:40:09 CEST
|
||||
" Filenames: *.xml
|
||||
" $Id$
|
||||
|
||||
@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ syn match xmlError "[<&]"
|
||||
"
|
||||
" <tag foo.attribute = "value">
|
||||
" ^^^^^^^
|
||||
syn region xmlString contained start=+"+ skip=+\\\\\|\\"+ end=+"+ contains=xmlEntity display
|
||||
syn region xmlString contained start=+'+ skip=+\\\\\|\\'+ end=+'+ contains=xmlEntity display
|
||||
syn region xmlString contained start=+"+ end=+"+ contains=xmlEntity display
|
||||
syn region xmlString contained start=+'+ end=+'+ contains=xmlEntity display
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
" punctuation (within attributes) e.g. <tag xml:foo.attribute ...>
|
||||
@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ else
|
||||
|
||||
endif
|
||||
|
||||
syn keyword xmlTodo contained TODO FIXME XXX display
|
||||
syn keyword xmlTodo contained TODO FIXME XXX
|
||||
syn match xmlCommentError contained "[^><!]"
|
||||
syn region xmlCommentPart
|
||||
\ start=+--+
|
||||
|
25
src/Makefile
25
src/Makefile
@ -1292,6 +1292,9 @@ DEST_MAN_TOP = $(DESTDIR)$(MANDIR)
|
||||
# directory first.
|
||||
# FreeBSD uses ".../man/xx.ISO8859-1/man1" for latin1, use that one too.
|
||||
DEST_MAN = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_FR = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/fr$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_FR_I = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/fr.ISO8859-1$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_FR_U = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/fr.UTF-8$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_IT = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/it$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_IT_I = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/it.ISO8859-1$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
DEST_MAN_IT_U = $(DEST_MAN_TOP)/it.UTF-8$(MAN1DIR)
|
||||
@ -1823,6 +1826,9 @@ installtools: $(TOOLS) $(DESTDIR)$(exec_prefix) $(DEST_BIN) \
|
||||
$(STRIP) $(DEST_BIN)/xxd$(EXEEXT)
|
||||
chmod $(BINMOD) $(DEST_BIN)/xxd$(EXEEXT)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_FR) "-fr" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_FR_I) "-fr" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_FR_U) "-fr.UTF-8" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_IT) "-it" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_IT_I) "-it" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh xxd $(DEST_MAN_IT_U) "-it.UTF-8" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
@ -1845,11 +1851,20 @@ installtools: $(TOOLS) $(DESTDIR)$(exec_prefix) $(DEST_BIN) \
|
||||
|
||||
# install the language specific files, if they were unpacked
|
||||
install-languages: languages $(DEST_LANG) $(DEST_KMAP)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_FR) "-fr" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_FR_I) "-fr" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_FR_U) "-fr.UTF-8" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_IT) "-it" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_IT_I) "-it" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_IT_U) "-it.UTF-8" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_RU) "-ru" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh install $(DEST_MAN_RU_U) "-ru.UTF-8" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh install "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh install "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR_I) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh install "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR_U) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh install "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_IT) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh install "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
@ -2006,6 +2021,9 @@ uninstall: uninstall_runtime
|
||||
# Note: the "rmdir" will fail if any files were added after "make install"
|
||||
uninstall_runtime:
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_FR) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_FR_I) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_FR_U) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_IT) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_IT_I) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_IT_U) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
@ -2013,6 +2031,12 @@ uninstall_runtime:
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installman.sh uninstall $(DEST_MAN_RU_U) "" $(INSTALLMANARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR_I) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_FR_U) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_IT) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
@ -2024,6 +2048,7 @@ uninstall_runtime:
|
||||
-$(SHELL) ./installml.sh uninstall "$(GUI_MAN_TARGETS)" \
|
||||
$(DEST_MAN_RU_U) $(INSTALLMLARGS)
|
||||
-rm -f $(DEST_MAN)/xxd.1
|
||||
-rm -f $(DEST_MAN_FR)/xxd.1 $(DEST_MAN_FR_I)/xxd.1 $(DEST_MAN_FR_U)/xxd.1
|
||||
-rm -f $(DEST_MAN_IT)/xxd.1 $(DEST_MAN_IT_I)/xxd.1 $(DEST_MAN_IT_U)/xxd.1
|
||||
-rm -f $(DEST_MAN_RU)/xxd.1 $(DEST_MAN_RU_U)/xxd.1
|
||||
-rm -f $(DEST_HELP)/*.txt $(DEST_HELP)/tags $(DEST_HELP)/*.pl
|
||||
|
@ -972,6 +972,19 @@ init_spell_chartab()
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
||||
else if (STRCMP(p_enc, "iso-8859-2") == 0)
|
||||
{
|
||||
/* latin2 */
|
||||
for ( ; i <= 0xa0; ++i)
|
||||
spell_chartab[i] = FALSE;
|
||||
for ( ; i <= 255; ++i)
|
||||
spell_chartab[i] = TRUE;
|
||||
spell_chartab[0xa4] = FALSE; /* currency sign */
|
||||
spell_chartab[0xa7] = FALSE; /* paragraph sign */
|
||||
spell_chartab[0xad] = FALSE; /* dash */
|
||||
spell_chartab[0xb0] = FALSE; /* degrees */
|
||||
spell_chartab[0xf7] = FALSE; /* divide-by */
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || !defined(MSDOS)
|
||||
@ -1117,6 +1130,7 @@ win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, col, headp)
|
||||
int numberextra;
|
||||
char_u *ps;
|
||||
int tab_corr = (*s == TAB);
|
||||
int n;
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* No 'linebreak' and 'showbreak': return quickly.
|
||||
@ -1160,9 +1174,12 @@ win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, col, headp)
|
||||
col2 = col;
|
||||
colmax = W_WIDTH(wp) - numberextra;
|
||||
if (col >= colmax)
|
||||
colmax += (((col - colmax)
|
||||
/ (colmax + win_col_off2(wp))) + 1)
|
||||
* (colmax + win_col_off2(wp));
|
||||
{
|
||||
n = colmax + win_col_off2(wp);
|
||||
if (n > 0)
|
||||
colmax += (((col - colmax) / n) + 1) * n;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
for (;;)
|
||||
{
|
||||
ps = s;
|
||||
|
@ -223,6 +223,9 @@ static void ex_popup __ARGS((exarg_T *eap));
|
||||
#ifndef FEAT_SYN_HL
|
||||
# define ex_syntax ex_ni
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#if !defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) || !defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
|
||||
# define ex_mkspell ex_ni
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#ifndef FEAT_MZSCHEME
|
||||
# define ex_mzscheme ex_script_ni
|
||||
# define ex_mzfile ex_ni
|
||||
@ -4149,11 +4152,11 @@ expand_filename(eap, cmdlinep, errormsgp)
|
||||
|
||||
/* For a shell command a '!' must be escaped. */
|
||||
if ((eap->usefilter || eap->cmdidx == CMD_bang)
|
||||
&& vim_strchr(repl, '!') != NULL)
|
||||
&& vim_strpbrk(repl, "!&;()") != NULL)
|
||||
{
|
||||
char_u *l;
|
||||
|
||||
l = vim_strsave_escaped(repl, (char_u *)"!");
|
||||
l = vim_strsave_escaped(repl, (char_u *)"!&;()");
|
||||
if (l != NULL)
|
||||
{
|
||||
vim_free(repl);
|
||||
@ -7328,7 +7331,8 @@ ex_equal(eap)
|
||||
ex_sleep(eap)
|
||||
exarg_T *eap;
|
||||
{
|
||||
int n;
|
||||
int n;
|
||||
long len;
|
||||
|
||||
if (cursor_valid())
|
||||
{
|
||||
@ -7336,7 +7340,15 @@ ex_sleep(eap)
|
||||
if (n >= 0)
|
||||
windgoto((int)n, curwin->w_wcol);
|
||||
}
|
||||
do_sleep(eap->line2 * (*eap->arg == 'm' ? 1L : 1000L));
|
||||
|
||||
len = eap->line2;
|
||||
switch (*eap->arg)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case 'm': break;
|
||||
case NUL: len *= 1000L; break;
|
||||
default: EMSG2(_(e_invarg2), eap->arg); return;
|
||||
}
|
||||
do_sleep(len);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
|
@ -2649,7 +2649,10 @@ buf_write(buf, fname, sfname, start, end, eap, append, forceit,
|
||||
if (reset_changed
|
||||
&& whole
|
||||
&& buf == curbuf
|
||||
&& curbuf->b_ffname == NULL
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
|
||||
&& !bt_nofile(buf)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
&& buf->b_ffname == NULL
|
||||
&& !filtering
|
||||
&& vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_FNAMEW) != NULL)
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
13
src/gui.c
13
src/gui.c
@ -4326,17 +4326,18 @@ ex_gui(eap)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* This is shared between Athena, Motif and GTK.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static char_u *gfp_buffer;
|
||||
|
||||
static void gfp_setname __ARGS((char_u *fname));
|
||||
static void gfp_setname __ARGS((char_u *fname, void *cookie));
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Callback function for do_in_runtimepath().
|
||||
*/
|
||||
static void
|
||||
gfp_setname(fname)
|
||||
gfp_setname(fname, cookie)
|
||||
char_u *fname;
|
||||
void *cookie;
|
||||
{
|
||||
char_u *gfp_buffer = cookie;
|
||||
|
||||
if (STRLEN(fname) >= MAXPATHL)
|
||||
*gfp_buffer = NUL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
@ -4356,8 +4357,8 @@ gui_find_bitmap(name, buffer, ext)
|
||||
if (STRLEN(name) > MAXPATHL - 14)
|
||||
return FAIL;
|
||||
sprintf((char *)buffer, "bitmaps/%s.%s", name, ext);
|
||||
gfp_buffer = buffer;
|
||||
if (do_in_runtimepath(buffer, FALSE, gfp_setname) == FAIL || *buffer == NUL)
|
||||
if (do_in_runtimepath(buffer, FALSE, gfp_setname, buffer) == FAIL
|
||||
|| *buffer == NUL)
|
||||
return FAIL;
|
||||
return OK;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -970,10 +970,20 @@ gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color)//{{{
|
||||
QPainter p(gui.w);
|
||||
p.setPen(color);
|
||||
p.fillRect(
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
|
||||
/* vertical line should be on the right of current point */
|
||||
CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w :
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
FILL_X(gui.col),
|
||||
FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h + 1,
|
||||
w, h - 2, QColor( color, color));
|
||||
p.drawRect(FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h
|
||||
p.drawRect(
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
|
||||
/* vertical line should be on the right of current point */
|
||||
CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w :
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
FILL_X(gui.col),
|
||||
FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h
|
||||
+ (int)p_linespace / 2,
|
||||
w, h - (int)p_linespace);
|
||||
}//}}}
|
||||
|
@ -1794,7 +1794,7 @@ gui_mch_draw_string(
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
||||
static WCHAR *unicodebuf = NULL;
|
||||
static int *unicodepdy = NULL;
|
||||
int unibuflen = 0;
|
||||
static int unibuflen = 0;
|
||||
int n = 0;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
HPEN hpen, old_pen;
|
||||
@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ gui_mch_draw_string(
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
||||
/* Check if the Unicode buffer exists and is big enough. Create it
|
||||
* with the same lengt as the multi-byte string, the number of wide
|
||||
* with the same length as the multi-byte string, the number of wide
|
||||
* characters is always equal or smaller. */
|
||||
if ((enc_utf8
|
||||
|| (enc_codepage > 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
|
||||
|
@ -260,8 +260,10 @@
|
||||
# define mb_ptr_adv(p) p += has_mbyte ? (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p) : 1
|
||||
# define mb_ptr_back(s, p) p -= has_mbyte ? ((*mb_head_off)(s, p - 1) + 1) : 1
|
||||
# define MB_COPY_CHAR(f, t) if (has_mbyte) mb_copy_char(&f, &t); else *t++ = *f++
|
||||
# define MB_CHARLEN(p) mb_charlen(p)
|
||||
#else
|
||||
# define mb_ptr_adv(p) ++p
|
||||
# define mb_ptr_back(s, p) --p
|
||||
# define MB_COPY_CHAR(f, t) *t++ = *f++
|
||||
# define MB_CHARLEN(p) STRLEN(p)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
@ -706,6 +706,11 @@ codepage_invalid:
|
||||
gui_mch_update_codec();
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_SYN_HL
|
||||
/* Need to reload spell dictionaries */
|
||||
spell_reload();
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -5241,7 +5241,8 @@ qsort(base, elm_count, elm_size, cmp)
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(FEAT_EX_EXTRA) || defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
|
||||
#if defined(FEAT_EX_EXTRA) || defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) \
|
||||
|| (defined(FEAT_SYN_HL) && defined(FEAT_MBYTE)) || defined(PROTO)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Sort an array of strings.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
25
src/normal.c
25
src/normal.c
@ -6065,6 +6065,18 @@ nv_brackets(cap)
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_SYN_HL
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* "[s", "[S", "]s" and "]S": move to next spell error.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
else if (cap->nchar == 's' || cap->nchar == 'S')
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (spell_move_to(cap->cmdchar == ']' ? FORWARD : BACKWARD,
|
||||
cap->nchar == 's' ? TRUE : FALSE) == FAIL)
|
||||
clearopbeep(cap->oap);
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
/* Not a valid cap->nchar. */
|
||||
else
|
||||
clearopbeep(cap->oap);
|
||||
@ -8493,6 +8505,7 @@ nv_put(cap)
|
||||
int regname = 0;
|
||||
void *reg1 = NULL, *reg2 = NULL;
|
||||
int empty = FALSE;
|
||||
int was_visual = FALSE;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
int dir;
|
||||
int flags = 0;
|
||||
@ -8527,6 +8540,7 @@ nv_put(cap)
|
||||
* Need to save and restore the registers that the delete
|
||||
* overwrites if the old contents is being put.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
was_visual = TRUE;
|
||||
regname = cap->oap->regname;
|
||||
# ifdef FEAT_CLIPBOARD
|
||||
adjust_clip_reg(®name);
|
||||
@ -8587,8 +8601,17 @@ nv_put(cap)
|
||||
/* If a register was saved, put it back now. */
|
||||
if (reg2 != NULL)
|
||||
put_register(regname, reg2);
|
||||
|
||||
/* What to reselect with "gv"? Selecting the just put text seems to
|
||||
* be the most useful, since the original text was removed. */
|
||||
if (was_visual)
|
||||
{
|
||||
curbuf->b_visual_start = curbuf->b_op_start;
|
||||
curbuf->b_visual_end = curbuf->b_op_end;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* When all lines were selected and deleted do_put() leaves an empty
|
||||
* line that needs to delete now. */
|
||||
* line that needs to be deleted now. */
|
||||
if (empty && *ml_get(curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count) == NUL)
|
||||
ml_delete(curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count, TRUE);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
@ -5177,6 +5177,8 @@ mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
|
||||
else if (!intick && vim_strchr((char_u *)" '",
|
||||
pat[i][j]) != NULL)
|
||||
{
|
||||
/* Put quotes around special characters, but not when
|
||||
* inside ``. */
|
||||
*p++ = '"';
|
||||
while (pat[i][j] != NUL
|
||||
&& vim_strchr((char_u *)" '", pat[i][j]) != NULL)
|
||||
|
@ -2338,11 +2338,9 @@ ex_vimgrep(eap)
|
||||
char_u **fnames;
|
||||
char_u *s;
|
||||
char_u *p;
|
||||
int i;
|
||||
int fi;
|
||||
qfline_T *prevp = NULL;
|
||||
long lnum;
|
||||
garray_T ga;
|
||||
buf_T *buf;
|
||||
int duplicate_name = FALSE;
|
||||
int using_dummy;
|
||||
@ -2404,12 +2402,7 @@ ex_vimgrep(eap)
|
||||
;
|
||||
|
||||
/* parse the list of arguments */
|
||||
if (get_arglist(&ga, p) == FAIL)
|
||||
goto theend;
|
||||
i = gen_expand_wildcards(ga.ga_len, (char_u **)ga.ga_data,
|
||||
&fcount, &fnames, EW_FILE|EW_NOTFOUND);
|
||||
ga_clear(&ga);
|
||||
if (i == FAIL)
|
||||
if (get_arglist_exp(p, &fcount, &fnames) == FAIL)
|
||||
goto theend;
|
||||
if (fcount == 0)
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
92
src/regexp.c
92
src/regexp.c
@ -738,65 +738,69 @@ reg_equi_class(c)
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch (c)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case 'A': case 'À': case 'Á': case 'Â':
|
||||
case 'Ã': case 'Ä': case 'Å':
|
||||
regmbc('A'); regmbc('À'); regmbc('Á'); regmbc('Â');
|
||||
regmbc('Ã'); regmbc('Ä'); regmbc('Å');
|
||||
case 'A': case '\300': case '\301': case '\302':
|
||||
case '\303': case '\304': case '\305':
|
||||
regmbc('A'); regmbc('\300'); regmbc('\301');
|
||||
regmbc('\302'); regmbc('\303'); regmbc('\304');
|
||||
regmbc('\305');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'C': case 'Ç':
|
||||
regmbc('C'); regmbc('Ç');
|
||||
case 'C': case '\307':
|
||||
regmbc('C'); regmbc('\307');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'E': case 'È': case 'É': case 'Ê': case 'Ë':
|
||||
regmbc('E'); regmbc('È'); regmbc('É'); regmbc('Ê');
|
||||
regmbc('Ë');
|
||||
case 'E': case '\310': case '\311': case '\312': case '\313':
|
||||
regmbc('E'); regmbc('\310'); regmbc('\311');
|
||||
regmbc('\312'); regmbc('\313');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'I': case 'Ì': case 'Í': case 'Î': case 'Ï':
|
||||
regmbc('I'); regmbc('Ì'); regmbc('Í'); regmbc('Î');
|
||||
regmbc('Ï');
|
||||
case 'I': case '\314': case '\315': case '\316': case '\317':
|
||||
regmbc('I'); regmbc('\314'); regmbc('\315');
|
||||
regmbc('\316'); regmbc('\317');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'N': case 'Ñ':
|
||||
regmbc('N'); regmbc('Ñ');
|
||||
case 'N': case '\321':
|
||||
regmbc('N'); regmbc('\321');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'O': case 'Ò': case 'Ó': case 'Ô': case 'Õ': case 'Ö':
|
||||
regmbc('O'); regmbc('Ò'); regmbc('Ó'); regmbc('Ô');
|
||||
regmbc('Õ'); regmbc('Ö');
|
||||
case 'O': case '\322': case '\323': case '\324': case '\325':
|
||||
case '\326':
|
||||
regmbc('O'); regmbc('\322'); regmbc('\323');
|
||||
regmbc('\324'); regmbc('\325'); regmbc('\326');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'U': case 'Ù': case 'Ú': case 'Û': case 'Ü':
|
||||
regmbc('U'); regmbc('Ù'); regmbc('Ú'); regmbc('Û');
|
||||
regmbc('Ü');
|
||||
case 'U': case '\331': case '\332': case '\333': case '\334':
|
||||
regmbc('U'); regmbc('\331'); regmbc('\332');
|
||||
regmbc('\333'); regmbc('\334');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'Y': case 'Ý':
|
||||
regmbc('Y'); regmbc('Ý');
|
||||
case 'Y': case '\335':
|
||||
regmbc('Y'); regmbc('\335');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'a': case 'à': case 'á': case 'â':
|
||||
case 'ã': case 'ä': case 'å':
|
||||
regmbc('a'); regmbc('à'); regmbc('á'); regmbc('â');
|
||||
regmbc('ã'); regmbc('ä'); regmbc('å');
|
||||
case 'a': case '\340': case '\341': case '\342':
|
||||
case '\343': case '\344': case '\345':
|
||||
regmbc('a'); regmbc('\340'); regmbc('\341');
|
||||
regmbc('\342'); regmbc('\343'); regmbc('\344');
|
||||
regmbc('\345');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'c': case 'ç':
|
||||
regmbc('c'); regmbc('ç');
|
||||
case 'c': case '\347':
|
||||
regmbc('c'); regmbc('\347');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'e': case 'è': case 'é': case 'ê': case 'ë':
|
||||
regmbc('e'); regmbc('è'); regmbc('é'); regmbc('ê');
|
||||
regmbc('ë');
|
||||
case 'e': case '\350': case '\351': case '\352': case '\353':
|
||||
regmbc('e'); regmbc('\350'); regmbc('\351');
|
||||
regmbc('\352'); regmbc('\353');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'i': case 'ì': case 'í': case 'î': case 'ï':
|
||||
regmbc('i'); regmbc('ì'); regmbc('í'); regmbc('î');
|
||||
regmbc('ï');
|
||||
case 'i': case '\354': case '\355': case '\356': case '\357':
|
||||
regmbc('i'); regmbc('\354'); regmbc('\355');
|
||||
regmbc('\356'); regmbc('\357');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'n': case 'ñ':
|
||||
regmbc('n'); regmbc('ñ');
|
||||
case 'n': case '\361':
|
||||
regmbc('n'); regmbc('\361');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'o': case 'ò': case 'ó': case 'ô': case 'õ': case 'ö':
|
||||
regmbc('o'); regmbc('ò'); regmbc('ó'); regmbc('ô');
|
||||
regmbc('õ'); regmbc('ö');
|
||||
case 'o': case '\362': case '\363': case '\364': case '\365':
|
||||
case '\366':
|
||||
regmbc('o'); regmbc('\362'); regmbc('\363');
|
||||
regmbc('\364'); regmbc('\365'); regmbc('\366');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'u': case 'ù': case 'ú': case 'û': case 'ü':
|
||||
regmbc('u'); regmbc('ù'); regmbc('ú'); regmbc('û');
|
||||
regmbc('ü');
|
||||
case 'u': case '\371': case '\372': case '\373': case '\374':
|
||||
regmbc('u'); regmbc('\371'); regmbc('\372');
|
||||
regmbc('\373'); regmbc('\374');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
case 'y': case 'ý': case 'ÿ':
|
||||
regmbc('y'); regmbc('ý'); regmbc('ÿ');
|
||||
case 'y': case '\375': case '\377':
|
||||
regmbc('y'); regmbc('\375'); regmbc('\377');
|
||||
return;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -3605,7 +3605,7 @@ win_line(wp, lnum, startrow, endrow)
|
||||
iswordc = spell_iswordc(prev_ptr);
|
||||
if (iswordc && !prev_iswordc)
|
||||
{
|
||||
word_end = v + spell_check(wp, prev_ptr,
|
||||
word_end = v + spell_check(wp, line, prev_ptr,
|
||||
&spell_attr);
|
||||
/* In Insert mode only highlight a word that
|
||||
* doesn't touch the cursor. */
|
||||
@ -8002,7 +8002,7 @@ showmode()
|
||||
if (gui.in_use)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (hangul_input_state_get())
|
||||
MSG_PUTS_ATTR(" 한글", attr); /* HANGUL */
|
||||
MSG_PUTS_ATTR(" \307\321\261\333", attr); /* HANGUL */
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
|
||||
|
4025
src/spell.c
4025
src/spell.c
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -2333,15 +2333,17 @@ findtag_end:
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
static garray_T tag_fnames = GA_EMPTY;
|
||||
static void found_tagfile_cb __ARGS((char_u *fname));
|
||||
static void found_tagfile_cb __ARGS((char_u *fname, void *cookie));
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Callback function for finding all "tags" and "tags-??" files in
|
||||
* 'runtimepath' doc directories.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
/*ARGSUSED*/
|
||||
static void
|
||||
found_tagfile_cb(fname)
|
||||
found_tagfile_cb(fname, cookie)
|
||||
char_u *fname;
|
||||
void *cookie;
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (ga_grow(&tag_fnames, 1) == OK)
|
||||
((char_u **)(tag_fnames.ga_data))[tag_fnames.ga_len++] =
|
||||
@ -2390,7 +2392,7 @@ get_tagfname(first, buf)
|
||||
#else
|
||||
"doc/tags"
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
, TRUE, found_tagfile_cb);
|
||||
, TRUE, found_tagfile_cb, NULL);
|
||||
hf_idx = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (*curbuf->b_p_tags != NUL)
|
||||
|
@ -36,5 +36,5 @@
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_NODOT "vim70aa"
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_SHORT "7.0aa"
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_MEDIUM "7.0aa ALPHA"
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_LONG "VIM - Vi IMproved 7.0aa ALPHA (2005 Mar 28)"
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_LONG_DATE "VIM - Vi IMproved 7.0aa ALPHA (2005 Mar 28, compiled "
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_LONG "VIM - Vi IMproved 7.0aa ALPHA (2005 Apr 15)"
|
||||
#define VIM_VERSION_LONG_DATE "VIM - Vi IMproved 7.0aa ALPHA (2005 Apr 15, compiled "
|
||||
|
Loading…
x
Reference in New Issue
Block a user